FACTORY AUTOMATION

INVERTER
FR-E700
All-rounder with a compact body
(Addition of Ethernet communication function models)

• Top level of driving performance in compact body

• Easy operability

• Extensive option lineup

• Ensured maintenance

• Compact and space-saving

• Supporting various applications

 Global Player

GLOBAL IMPACT OF
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

Through Mitsubishi Electric’s vision, “Changes for the Better“ are possible for a brighter future.

Mitsubishi Electric is involved in many areas including the following

We bring together the best minds to Energy and Electric Systems

create the best technologies. At A wide range of power and electrical products from generators to large-scale displays.
Mitsubishi Electric, we understand
that technology is the driving force of Electronic Devices
change in our lives. By bringing A wide portfolio of cutting-edge semiconductor devices for systems and products.
greater comfort to daily life, maximiz-
ing the efficiency of businesses and Home Appliance
keeping things running across Dependable consumer products like air conditioners and home entertain-
society, we integrate technology and ment systems.
innovation to bring changes for the
better. Information and Communication Systems
Commercial and consumer-centric equipment, products and systems.

Industrial Automation Systems

Maximizing productivity and efficiency with cutting-edge automation technology.

2
 Contents

Features 4

Connection example 9

Standard Specifications 10

Outline Dimensions 14

Terminal Connection Diagram, Terminal Specifications 23

Operation panel, Parameter unit, FR Configurator 35

Parameter List 39

Explanations of Parameters 48

Protective Functions 71

Option and Peripheral Devices 72

Precautions for Operation/Selection, Precautions for Peripheral Device Selection 87

Application to Motor 92

FR-E500 Series Compatibility 97

Warranty 99

3
 Evolution in all functions
1 Top level of driving performance in compact body
The inverter became more powerful.

(1) High torque 200%/0.5Hz is realized by Advanced magnetic flux vector control (3.7K or lower)
By the advancement of General-purpose magnetic flux vector
Advanced auto tuning
control to Advanced magnetic flux vector control, top level of
Many kinds of three phase induction motors can be optimally
driving performance became possible. Since V/F control and
controlled with Mitsubishi Electric's original "non-rotation" auto
General-purpose magnetic flux vector control operations are
tuning function. High precision tuning is enabled even when a test
available, operation after replacement of the conventional model
operation of a machine cannot be performed at parameter
(FR-E500 series) is ensured.
adjustment.
For the 5.5K to 15K, 150%/0.5Hz torque is realized.

Speed/torque characteristics example

FR-E720-3.7K (SC) (NF) (NC) (Advanced magnetic flux vector control)
SF-JR 4P 3.7kW
Load
torque (%)

200%

100%
3Hz 30Hz 60Hz
0
500 1000 1500 2000

-100%

-200%
Advanced magnetic flux vector control is ideal
for a lift in an automated-storage system which
Speed (r/min) requires high torque at low speed.

(2) Short time overload capacity

is increased (200% 3s) (3) Torque limit/current limit function
Short time overload capacity is increased to 200% 3s (200% 0.5s for Improved torque limit/current limit function provides a machine
the conventional model). Overcurrent trip is less likely to occur. protection, load limit, and stop-on-contact operation.

When a bogie runs over a bump, the impact can Using the torque limit function, machine
be beared by this function. breakage from overload can be avoided.
For example, edge chipping of a tool can be avoided.

(4) Improved regeneration capability

A brake transistor is built-in to the 0.4K to 15K.
Connecting an optional brake resistor increases regeneration
capability.
4
Easy/powerful compact inverter
•Features

2 Excellent usability
•Connection
Usability was thoroughly pursued. example

(1) Improved setting dial

Easy setting with the Mitsubishi Electric setting dial.
•Standard
Specifications
•Displayed numbers can be jumped by turning the setting dial quickly, and numbers can
be changed one by one by turning it slowly, enabling speedy parameter setting.
• The nonslip setting dial is easier to turn. •Outline
Dimension
(2) Easy setting mode Drawings

According to the desired command sources for start frequency and speed, Pr.79 can be set in simple steps.
•Terminal Connection
Blinking Diagram
Blinking
Operation method Panel display •Terminal Specification
Start command Speed command Monitor LED
Setting Explanation
PU EXT
RUN button Setting dial 79 - 1 Blinking
complete
External terminal Analog voltage
79 - 2
PU EXT
•Operation panel
STF/STR input Blinking
and •Parameter unit
External terminal
•FR Configurator
PU EXT

STF/STR
Setting dial 79 - 3 ON Blinking
blink
Press and button Turn to select RUN button Analog voltage
PU EXT

input
79 - 4 Blinking ON Press to set.
simultaneously (0.5s). operation method.

(3) With a provided USB connector, setting is easily done from •Parameter List
a personal computer using FR Configurator
An USB connector (mini-B connector) is provided as standard. The inverter can be easily connected without a USB-RS-485 converter.
Wizard (interactive) function of FR Configurator (inverter setup software) provides setting support.
•Explanations
of Parameters
In addition, a high-speed graph function with USB enables high speed sampling display.
Expanded advanced
operability with USB
Setting wizard function (example: acceleration/deceleration time setting)
and FR Configurator •Protective
Functions
High speed graph function
Mini-B
connector •Option and
Peripheral Devices

Acceleration/deceleration
pattern setting •Precautions for
Operation/Selection
•Precautions for Peripheral
Acceleration/deceleration Device Selection
time setting
Inverter
•Application
USB cable to Motor
Parameter list display FR Configurator

(4) Enclosure surface operation panel (5) Parameter unit FR-PU07/ •Main Differences and
Compatibilities with
FR-PA07 (option) FR-PU07BB(-L) (option) the FR-E500 Series
Optional enclosure surface operation panel (FR-PA07) can The FR-PU07/FR-PU07BB(-L), an optional parameter unit, can
be connected. be connected as well.
In addition, an operation panel for conventional model A parameter unit connection cable (FR-CB20 ) is separately
required. (Parameter unit connection cable FR-CB203 (3m) is
•Warranty
(FR-E500 series) can be connected. enclosed with FR-PU07BB(-L).)

The operation panel of the inverter cannot be removed. •Setting such as direct input method with a numeric keypad,
A parameter unit connection cable (FR-CB20 ) is operation status indication, and help function are useful.
separately required.
The display language can be selected from 8 languages.
•Service
•Parameter settings of maximum of three inverters can be stored.
•International FA Center
•A battery pack type (FR-PU07BB(-L)) allows parameter setting
and parameter copy without power-ON the inverter.
To use a parameter unit with battery pack outside Japan, order the FR-PU07BB-L
(model indicated with "L" at the end).
5
 3 Enhanced expandability
Mitsubishi Electric inverters offer the expandability that answers to every need

(1) A variety of plug-in options are mountable

Plug-in options supporting digital input, analog output extension, and a variety of communications provide extended functions which is
almost equivalent to the FR-A700 series. (One type of plug-in option can be mounted.)
[For the standard control circuit terminal model, order the FR-A7 E kit, which contains an option board FR-A7 and its dedicated front cover.]
The FR-A7 E kit can be used for the standard control circuit terminal model only.
For the safety stop function model, use an FR-A7 and a separate dedicated front cover.

Compatible Plug-in Options

• FR-A7AX (E kit) ... 16-bit digital input • FR-A7NC (E kit) ... CC-Link
• FR-A7AY (E kit) ... Digital output • FR-A7ND (E kit) ... DeviceNet
Extension analog output • FR-A7NP (E kit) ... PROFIBUS-DP
• FR-A7AR (E kit) ... Relay output • FR-A7NL (E kit) ... LONWORKS
• FR-E7DS ............ 24VDC input*1 • E7NECT_2P*2...... EtherCAT
Plug-in option
Plug-in option dedicated front cover *1: This option is available for the safety stop function model only. The dedicated front cover is enclosed with the option.
*2: Manufactured by HMS Industrial Networks AB. (Only compatible with dedicated EtherCAT communication models)

(3) Control terminals are

(2) Safety stop function (FR-E700-SC/NF/NC) selectable according to applications
•Spring clamp terminals are adopted as control circuit terminals. For the customers who need more than
Spring clamp terminals are highly reliable and can be easily wired. the standard terminals, the control
•The FR-E700-SC series is compliant to the EU Machinery Directive terminal option, RS-485 2 port terminal
without the addition of previously required external devices. block, is available. Terminal
Operation of an external Emergency Stop device results in a highly A terminal card is removable and can be
card

reliable immediate shutoff of the D700's output to the motor. easily replaced from a standard terminal card.
This safety stop function conforms to the following standards.
EN ISO 13849-1 Category 3 / PLd
EN62061 / IEC61508 SIL2
(4) Various kinds of networks are supported
•EIA-485 (RS-485), MODBUS®RTU (equipped as standard), CC-Link,
Provided by the user (present) FR-D700
PROFIBUS-DP, DeviceNet™, LONWORKS®, EtherCAT® (optional)
Safety function
is equipped * •Network-compatible inverters, the CC-Link communication model (FR-E700-NC)
Emergency stop Emergency stop
•Magnetic contactor (MC)
•Emergency stop wiring
and the FL remote communication model (FR-E700-NF), are also available.
•A network compatible inverter, the Ethernet communication function
model (FR-E700-NE) is now available. CC-Link IE Field Network Basic,
MELSOFT / FA product connection and MODBUS/TCP supported.
Only one MC is recommended
For conventional model... instead of two.
Two MCs were necessary Although MC is not required (5) Environment-conscious filter options
•High cost
for the safety stop function.
•Maintenance of two MCs •Cost reduction •Filterpack FR-BFP2 (the package of the power factor improving DC
was necessary •Maintenance of one MC
•Installation space was necessary •Installation space is reduced reactor, common mode choke, and capacitive filter) is available for
*: Approved safety relay unit
compliance with the Japanese harmonic suppression guidelines.
•A noise filter option for compliance with the EMC Directive
(EN61800-3 2nd Environment Category C3) is also available.

4 Compact and space saving

Compact design expands flexibility of enclosure design.

(1) Compact body with high performance function (2) Side by side installation saves space
Installation size is the same as Space can be saved by side by side
the conventional mode (FR-E500 no clearance installation*.
series) in consideration of 128mm *: Use the inverter at the surrounding air temperature
intercompatibility. (7.5K or lower) of 40˚C or less.

FR-E720-0.2K FR-E520-0.2K

•Offer a selection of small frames •Support with low-level load (auxiliary contact)
Mitsubishi Electric
•Offer a line-up of safety contactors •Support many international regulations as a standard model
magnetic contactors
Refer to page 85 for the selection.

6
 5 Easy servicing for peace of mind

Features
The 700 series is the pioneer of long life and high reliability.

(1) Long-life design (3) Easy replacement of cooling fans

Connection
example
•The design life of the cooling fan has been extended to 10 A cooling fan is provided on top of the
years*1. The life of the fan can be further extended utilizing the inverter for all capacities requiring a
it’s ON/OFF control. cooling fan*.
•The design life of the capacitors has been extended to 10 years*1*2

Specifications
Cooling fans can be easily replaced

Standard
by adopting a capacitor that endures about 5000 hours at 105°C without disconnecting main circuit wires.
surrounding air temperature. *: Cooling fans are equipped with models of 1.5K and
*1: Surrounding air temperature : annual average 40˚C (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, above. (single phase 200V class 0.75K and above)
oil mist, dust and dirt) Since the design life is a calculated value, it is not a guaranteed value.

Dimension
*2: Output current : 80% of the inverter rated current

Drawings
Outline
•Estimated service lifespan of the long-life parts
Components Estimated lifespan of the FR-E700 Guideline of JEMA*3
(4) Combed shaped wiring cover
Cooling fan 10 years 2 to 3 years Wiring is easy as the wiring cover can be

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
Main circuit smoothing capacitor 10 years 5 years installed after wiring is complete.

Explanation
Diagram
Printed board smoothing capacitor 10 years 5 years
*3: Excerpts from “Periodic check of the transistorized inverter” of JEMA (Japan Electrical Manufacturer’s Association)

(2) Advanced life check function

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
•Degrees of deterioration of main circuit capacitor, control circuit
capacitor, and inrush current limit circuit can be monitored.
•Trouble can be avoided with the self-diagnostic alarm*4 that is
(5) Removable control terminal block

Parameter
output when the life span is near. Wiring of the control circuit when replacing the same series

List
*4: Any one of main circuit capacitor, control circuit capacitor, inrush current limit circuit or inverter can be done by changing the terminal block.
cooling fan reaches the output level, an alarm is output.
Capacity of the main circuit capacitor can be measured by setting parameter at a stop and
turning the power from off to on. Measuring the capacity enables an alarm to be output.

Explanations

Parameters
of
6 Full of useful functions

Protective
Functions
Enhanced functions for all sorts of applications
•Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function with •Power-failure deceleration stop function/operation continuation
frequency search at instantaneous power failure function

Options
The motor can be decelerated to a stop when a power failure or
Input voltage Output frequency Input voltage Output frequency undervoltage occurs to prevent the motor from coasting.
This function is useful to stop a motor at power failure as a fail
Motor speed Motor speed
safe of machine tool, etc.

Instructions
With the new operation continuation function at instantaneous
power failure, the motor continues running without coasting
Output current Output current
even if an instantaneous power failure occurs during operation.
FR-E500 series FR-E700 series
*: The inverter may trip and the motor may coast depending on the load condition.
Detection of coasting speed (frequency search function) prevents the motor speed from
Motor

decreasing at a restart, starting the motor smoothly with less output current.

•Brake sequence mode is useful for mechanical brake control of a lift.

•Regeneration avoidance function prevents regenerative overvoltage in a pressing machine.
•Main circuit power supply DC input
Compatibility

can be connected to DC power supply.

•Enhanced I/O terminal function supports switchover of analog input (voltage / current).
•Password function is effective for parameter setting protection.
and so on
Warranty

Energy saving for fans and pumps

•Load pattern selection (Pr. 14)
Inquiry

Optimal output characteristics (V/F characteristics) for application or load characteristics can be selected.
•Optimum excitation control (Pr. 60)
With Optimum excitation control to achieve the highest motor efficiency, further energy saving can be achieved.
Refer to page 70
7
 Lineup

FR-E720 -0.1K

Symbol Voltage Symbol Number of Power Phases Symbol Inverter Capacity Control circuit terminal Symbol Function
Symbol specification
1 100V class None Three-phase input 0.1K Represents the None Standard type
2 200V class S Single-phase input to inverter capacity Standard control circuit -NE*2 Ethernet communication*1
None
4 400V class Single-phase input 15K "kW". terminal model (screw type) Dedicated EtherCAT
W SC Safety stop function model -TM*3
(double voltage output) communication model
NF FL remote communication model
NC CC-Link communication model

Inverter Safety stop

Voltage class Inverter model 0.1K 0.2K 0.4K 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K
type function
Three-phase 200V class FR-E720-[ ][ ]           
Standard control
Three-phase 400V class FR-E740-[ ][ ] — —         
circuit terminal NO
Single-phase 200V class FR-E720S-[ ][ ]*4       — — — — —
model
Single-phase 100V class FR-E710W-[ ][ ]*4     — — — — — — —
Safety stop Three-phase 200V class FR-E720-[ ][ ]SC           
function YES Three-phase 400V class FR-E740-[ ][ ]SC — —         
model Single-phase 200V class FR-E720S-[ ][ ]SC*4       — — — — —
Three-phase 200V class FR-E720-[ ][ ]-NE*2           
NO
Three-phase 400V class FR-E740-[ ][ ]-NE*2 — —         
FR-E720-[ ][ ]NF
Communication Three-phase 200V class FR-E720-[ ][ ]NC           
model FR-E720-[ ][ ]SC-TM*3
YES
FR-E740-[ ][ ]NF
Three-phase 400V class FR-E740-[ ][ ]NC — —         
FR-E740-[ ][ ]SC-TM*3
*1: CC-Link IE Field Network Basic supported (refer to page 6). :Available models :Not available
*2: Standard control circuit terminal model only.
*3: Safety stop function model only. By installing the EtherCAT communication option
(E7NECT_2P manufactured by HMS Industrial Networks AB), EtherCAT communication is possible.
*4: The output of the single-phase 200V and single-phase 100V input models is three-phase 200V.

Complies with UL, cUL, and EC Directives (CE marking),

and the Radio Waves Act (South Korea) (KC marking).
It is also certified as compliant with the Eurasian Conformity (EAC).
The single-phase 100V power input model is not compliant with the EMC Directive.

The inverters are compliant with the EU RoHS Directive (Restriction of

the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic
Equipment), friendly to people and to the environment.

8
 Connectivity

Features
AC power supply
Use within the permissible power supply

Connection
specifications of the inverter.

example
To ensure safety, use a molded case circuit
breaker, earth leakage circuit breaker or Enclosure surface
magnetic contactor to switch power ON/OFF. operation panel (FR-PA07)
Connect a connection cable (FR-CB2) to

Specifications
Molded case circuit breaker the PU connector to use the FR-PA07,

Standard
(MCCB) or earth leakage current FR-PU07/FR-PU07BB(-L).*2
breaker (ELB), fuse Parameter unit
The breaker must be selected carefully USB connector
(FR-PU07/FR-PU07BB(-L))
since an in-rush current flows in the A personal computer and an inverter can
be connected with a USB (Ver1.1) cable.

Dimension
inverter at power on.

Drawings
Outline
Approved safety
Magnetic contactor (MC) relay module
Install the magnetic contactor to ensure Required for compliance

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
safety. Do not use this magnetic contactor with safety standard.

Explanation
Diagram
to start and stop the inverter. Doing so will The module can be used
cause the inverter life to be shortened. for the safety stop function
S1 model, FL remote
S2 communication model,
Reactor (FR-HAL, FR-HEL PC and CC-Link

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
option) communication model.
Install reactors to suppress harmonics and
to improve the power factor.
A reactor (option) is required when
installing the inverter near a large power

Parameter
supply system (500kVA or more).
Brake resistor

List
The inverter may be damaged if you do
not use reactors. Select the reactor (FR-ABR, MRS, MYS)
Braking capability can be improved.
according to the model. Remove the
(0.4K or higher)
jumpers across terminals P/+ - P1 to
Always install a thermal relay when

Explanations

Parameters
connect the DC reactor. using a brake resistor whose
capacity is 11K or higher.

of
AC reactor (FR-HAL) DC reactor (FR-HEL)*1

P/+

Protective
PR

Functions
P/+ P1 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
P/+ N/- U VW
Earth
(Ground)

Options
Noise filter (ferrite core)*1
(FR-BSF01, FR-BLF) Noise filter (ferrite core)
Install a noise filter to reduce (FR-BSF01, FR-BLF)
the electromagnetic noise Install a noise filter to reduce the
generated from the inverter.

Instructions
Noise filter electromagnetic noise generated
Effective in the range from
about 1MHz to 10MHz. (capacitor)*1 from the inverter.
When more wires are passed (FR-BIF) Effective in the range from about
through, a more effective Reduces 1MHz to 10MHz. A wire should be
result can be obtained. A radio noise. wound four turns at a maximum.
wire should be wound four
turns or more. Motor
Motor

*1: Filterpack (FR-BFP2), which contains DC reactor and noise filter in one package, is also available.
Compatibility

Brake unit (FR-BU2)

Earth
(Ground)
Warranty

Devices connected to the output

P/+ PR Do not install a power factor correction capacitor,
P/+ surge suppressor or radio noise filter on the output side
PR of the inverter. When installing a molded case circuit
breaker on the output side of the inverter,
contact each manufacturer for selection of the molded
Inquiry

case circuit breaker.

High power factor Power regeneration Resistor unit (FR-BR) Earth (Ground)
converter (FR-HC2) common converter (FR-CV) Discharging resistor (GZG, GRZG) To prevent an electric shock, always earth (ground) the
Power supply harmonics Great braking capability is obtained. The regenerative braking capability of motor and inverter. For reduction of induction noise from
can be greatly suppressed. Install this as required.*2 the inverter can be exhibited fully. the power line of the inverter, it is recommended to wire
Install this as required.*2 Install this as required. the earth (ground) cable by returning it to the earth
(ground) terminal of the inverter.

*2: The converter is used for the standard control circuit terminal model or the safety stop function model. 9
 Standard specifications

Rating
 Three-phase 200V power supply
Model FR-E720-K
0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15
(SC)(NF)(NC)(-NE)(-TM)
Applicable motor capacity (kW) 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15
Rated capacity (kVA) 0.3 0.6 1.2 2.0 3.2 4.4 7.0 9.5 13.1 18.7 23.9
0.8 1.5 3 5 8 11 17.5 24 33 47 60
Rated current (A)
Output

(0.8) (1.4) (2.5) (4.1) (7) (10) (16.5) (23) (31) (44) (57)
Overload current rating 150% 60s, 200% 3s (inverse-time characteristics)
Rated voltage Three-phase 200 to 240V
Regenerative braking torque 150% 100% 50% 20%
Rated input
Three-phase 200 to 240V 50Hz/60Hz (283 to 339VDC)
Power supply

AC (DC) voltage/frequency
Permissible AC (DC) voltage
170 to 264V 50Hz/60Hz (240 to 373VDC)
fluctuation
Permissible frequency fluctuation ±5%
Power supply capacity (kVA) 0.4 0.8 1.5 2.5
4.5 5.5 9 12 17 20 28
Enclosed type (IP20)
Protective structure (JEM1030) Open type (IP00) for the FL remote communication model, CC-Link communication model, and
the dedicated EtherCAT communication model.
Cooling system Natural Forced air
Approximate mass (kg) 0.5 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.4 1.4 1.7 4.3 4.3 6.5 6.5

 Three-phase 400V power supply

Model FR-E740-K
0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15
(SC)(NF)(NC)(-NE)(-TM)
Applicable motor capacity (kW) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15
Rated capacity (kVA) 1.2 2.0 3.0 4.6 7.2 9.1 13.0 17.5 23.0
1.6 2.6 4.0 6.0 9.5
Rated current (A) 12 17 23 30
Output

(1.4) (2.2) (3.8) (5.4) (8.7)

Overload current rating 150% 60s, 200% 3s (inverse-time characteristics)
Rated voltage Three-phase 380 to 480V
Regenerative braking torque 100% 50% 20%
Rated input voltage/frequency Three-phase 380 to 480V 50Hz/60Hz (537 to 679VDC)
Power supply

Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 325 to 528V 50Hz/60Hz (457 to 740VDC)

Permissible frequency fluctuation ±5%
Power supply capacity (kVA) 1.5 2.5 4.5 5.5 9.5 12 17 20 28
Enclosed type (IP20)
Protective structure (JEM1030) Open type (IP00) for the FL remote communication model, CC-Link communication model, and
the dedicated EtherCAT communication model.
Cooling system Natural Forced air
Approximate mass (kg) 1.4 1.4 1.9 1.9 1.9 3.2 3.2 6.0 6.0

 The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor.
 The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 230V for three-phase 200V class and 440V for three-phase 400V class.
 The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time for
the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
 The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However,
the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about 2 that of the power supply.
 The braking torque indicated is a short-duration average torque (which varies with motor loss) when the motor alone is decelerated from 60Hz in the shortest
time and is not a continuous regenerative torque. When the motor is decelerated from the frequency higher than the base frequency, the average
deceleration torque will reduce. Since the inverter does not contain a brake resistor, use the optional brake resistor when regenerative energy is large. A
brake unit (FR-BU2) may also be used. (Option brake resistor cannot be used for 0.1K and 0.2K.)
 The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).
 Setting 2kHz or more in Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection to perform low acoustic noise operation in the surrounding air temperature exceeding 40°C, the rated
output current is the value in parenthesis.
  Connect DC power supply to terminal P/+ and N/-. Connect the plus side of the power supply to terminal P/+ and minus side to terminal N/-.
 When energy is regenerated from the motor, the voltage between terminals P/+ and N/- may rise to 415V of more for the 200V class, or 810V or more for
the 400V class. Use a DC power supply resistant to the regenerative voltage/energy.
If using the power supply which cannot withstand voltage/energy during regeneration, insert diodes in series for reverse current prevention.
 Although the FR-E700 series has the built-in inrush current limit circuit, select the DC power supply considering the inrush current at power-ON as the
inrush current four times of the rated inverter flows at power-ON.
 Since the power supply capacity depends on the output impedance of the power, select the power supply capacity which has enough allowance according
to the AC power supply system capacity.
 The safety stop function model is indicated with SC.
 "NF" indicates the FL remote communication function model.
 "NC" indicates the CC-Link communication model.
 "-NE" indicates the Ethernet communication function model.
 "-TM" indicates the dedicated EtherCAT communication model. (Only for inverters that support the safety stop function.)

10
 Single-phase 200V power supply
Model FR-E720S-K
0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2
(SC)(-NE)

Features
Applicable motor capacity (kW) 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2
Rated capacity (kVA) 0.3 0.6 1.2 2.0 3.2 4.4
0.8 1.5 3.0 5.0 8.0 11.0
Rated current (A)

Connection
Output

(0.8) (1.4) (2.5) (4.1) (7.0) (10.0)

example
Overload current rating 150% 60s, 200% 3s (inverse-time characteristics)
Rated voltage Three-phase 200 to 240V
Regenerative braking torque 150% 100% 50% 20%

Specifications
Rated input AC voltage/frequency Single-phase 200 to 240V 50Hz/60Hz

Standard
Power supply

Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 170 to 264V 50Hz/60Hz

Permissible frequency fluctuation Within ±5%

Power supply capacity (kVA) 0.5 0.9 1.5 2.5 4.0 5.2

Dimension
Drawings
Outline
Protective structure (JEM1030) Enclosed type (IP20)
Cooling system Natural Forced air
Approximate mass (kg) 0.6 0.6 0.9 1.4 1.5 2.0

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection

Explanation
Diagram
 Single-phase 100V power supply
Model FR-E710W-K 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Applicable motor capacity (kW) 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75

Parameter unit
Rated capacity (kVA) 0.3 0.6 1.2 2.0
0.8 1.5 3.0 5.0
Rated current (A)
(0.8) (1.4) (2.5) (4.1)
Output

150% 60s, 200% 3s

Parameter
Overload current rating
(inverse-time characteristics)

List
Rated voltage Three-phase 200 to 230V, 
Regenerative braking torque 150% 100%

Explanations
Rated input AC voltage/frequency Single-phase 100 to 115V 50Hz/60Hz

Parameters
Power supply

Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 90 to 132V 50Hz/60Hz

of
Permissible frequency fluctuation Within ±5%

Power supply capacity (kVA) 0.5 0.9 1.5 2.5

Protective
Functions
Protective structure (JEM1030) Enclosed type (IP20)
Cooling system Natural
Approximate mass (kg) 0.6 0.7 0.9 1.5

Options
 The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor.
 The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 230V.
 The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time for
the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load. If the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function (Pr. 57) or
Instructions

power failure stop function (Pr. 261) is set and power supply voltage is low while load becomes bigger, the bus voltage decreases to power failure detection
level and load of 100% or more may not be available.
 The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However,
the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about 2 that of the power supply.
 The braking torque indicated is a short-duration average torque (which varies with motor loss) when the motor alone is decelerated from 60Hz in the shortest
time and is not a continuous regenerative torque. When the motor is decelerated from the frequency higher than the base frequency, the average
Motor

deceleration torque will reduce. Since the inverter does not contain a brake resistor, use the optional brake resistor when regenerative energy is large. A
brake unit (FR-BU2) may also be used. (Option brake resistor cannot be used for 0.1K and 0.2K.)
 The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).
 Setting 2kHz or more in Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection to perform low acoustic noise operation with the surrounding air temperature exceeding 40°C, the
Compatibility

rated output current is the value in parenthesis.

 For single-phase 100V power input model, the maximum output voltage is twice the amount of the power supply voltage and cannot be exceeded.
 In a single-phase 100V power input model, the output voltage may fall down when the load is heavy, and larger output current may flow compared to a
threephase input model. Use the motor with less load so that the output current is within the rated motor current range.
 The safety stop function model is indicated with SC.
Warranty

 "-NE" indicates the Ethernet communication function model.

Inquiry

11
 Common specifications
Soft-PWM control/high carrier frequency PWM control (V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control,
Control method General-purpose magnetic flux vector control, Optimum excitation control are available)
Output frequency range 0.2 to 400Hz

Analog input 0.06Hz/60Hz (terminal2, 4: 0 to 10V/10bit)

Frequency setting  0.12Hz/60Hz (terminal2, 4: 0 to 5V/9bit)
0.06Hz/60Hz (terminal4: 0 to 20mA/10bit)
Control specifications

resolution
Digital input 0.01Hz
Analog input
Frequency Within 0.5% of the max. output frequency (25°C 10°C)

accuracy
Digital input Within 0.01% of the set output frequency
Voltage/frequency characteristics Base frequency can be set from 0 to 400Hz, Constant-torque/variable torque pattern can be selected
Starting torque 200% or more (at 0.5Hz)...when Advanced magnetic flux vector control is set (3.7K or lower)
Torque boost Manual torque boost

Acceleration/deceleration time setting 0.01 to 360s, 0.1 to 3600s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/
deceleration modes are available.
DC injection brake Operation frequency (0 to 120Hz), operation time (0 to 10s), operation voltage (0 to 30%) can be changed.
Stall prevention operation level Operation current level can be set (0 to 200% adjustable), whether to use the function or not can be selected

Analog input Two terminals

Terminal 2: 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V can be selected
 Terminal 4: 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V, 4 to 20mA can be selected
Frequency setting
signal Input from the operation panel or parameter unit. (Instead of the input from the parameter unit, input via the FL
remote network is available for the FL remote communication model, and input via the CC-Link network is
Digital input available for the CC-Link communication model.) Frequency setting increment is selectable.
4 digit BCD or 16bit binary data (when the option FR-A7AX E kit is used)
Start signal Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be selected.
The following signals can be assigned to Pr. 178 to Pr.184 (input terminal function selection): multi-speed selection,
Input signal remote setting, stop-on contact selection, second function selection, terminal 4 input selection, JOG operation
(Standard control circuit terminal selection, PID control valid terminal, brake opening completion signal, external thermal input, PU-External
model: Seven terminals operation switchover, V/F switchover, output stop, start self-holding selection, forward rotation, reverse
Operation specifications

Safety stop function model: Six rotation command, inverter reset, PU-NET operation switchover, External-NET operation
terminals) switchover, command source switchover, inverter operation enable signal, and PU operation external
interlock
Maximum/minimum frequency setting, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay input selection,
automatic restart after instantaneous power failure operation, forward/reverse rotation prevention, remote setting,
Operational functions brake sequence, second function, multi-speed operation, stop-on contact control, droop control, regeneration
avoidance, slip compensation, operation mode selection, offline auto tuning function, PID control, computer
link operation (RS-485)
Safety shutoff signal can be input from terminals S1 and S2. (compliant with EN ISO 13849-1 Category 3 / PLd
Safety stop function EN62061 / IEC61508 SIL2)
Output signal The following signals can be assigned to Pr.190 to Pr.192 (output terminal function selection): inverter operation, up-
Open collector output (Two terminals) to-frequency, overload alarm, output frequency detection, regenerative brake prealarm, electronic thermal relay
Relay output (One terminal) function prealarm, inverter operation ready, output current detection, zero current detection, PID lower limit, PID
upper limit, PID forward/reverse rotation output, brake opening request, fan alarm, heatsink overheat pre-
alarm, deceleration at an instantaneous power failure, PID control activated, safety monitor output, safety
Operating status monitor output2, 24V external power supply operation, during retry, life alarm, current average value monitor,
remote output, alarm output, fault output, fault output 3, and maintenance timer alarm
The following signals can be assigned to Pr.54 FM terminal function selection: output frequency, motor current
For meter (steady), output voltage, frequency setting, motor torque, converter output voltage, regenerative brake duty,
Pulse train output electronic thermal relay function load factor, output current peak value, converter output voltage peak value,
(Max. 2.4kHz: one terminal) reference voltage output, motor load factor, PID set point, PID measured value, output power
Pulse train output (1440 pulses/s/full scale)
The following operating status can be displayed: output frequency, motor current (steady), output voltage,
frequency setting, cumulative energization time, actual operation time, motor torque, converter output voltage,
Operating status regenerative brake duty, electronic thermal relay function load factor, output current peak value, converter output
voltage peak value, motor load factor, PID set point, PID measured value, PID deviation, inverter I/O
Indication

Operation panel
terminal monitor, I/O terminal option monitor, output power, cumulative power, motor thermal load factor,
and inverter thermal load factor.
Parameter unit
(FR-PU07) Fault record is displayed when a fault occurs. Past 8 fault records (output voltage/current/frequency/cumulative
Fault record energization time right before the fault occurs) are stored
Interactive
Function (help) for operation guide
guidance
Overcurrent during acceleration, overcurrent during constant speed, overcurrent during deceleration, overvoltage
during acceleration, overvoltage during constant speed, overvoltage during deceleration, inverter protection
Protective thermal operation, motor protection thermal operation, heatsink overheat, input phase failure, stall prevention
stop, output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent at start, output short circuit, output phase failure, external
functions thermal relay operation, option fault, parameter error, internal board fault, PU disconnection,
Protective/warning
function retry count excess, CPU fault, brake transistor alarm, inrush resistance overheat, communication error, analog
input error, USB communication error, brake sequence error 4 to 7, safety circuit fault

Warning Fan alarm, overcurrent stall prevention, overvoltage stall prevention, PU stop, parameter write error,
regenerative brake prealarm, electronic thermal relay function prealarm, maintenance output, undervoltage,
functions operation panel lock, password locked, inverter reset, safety stop, 24V external power supply in operation
Surrounding air temperature -10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)
Environment

Ambient humidity 90%RH or less (non-condensing)

Storage temperature -20°C to +65°C
Atmosphere Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc.)
Altitude/vibration Maximum 1000m, 5.9m/s2 or less at 10 to 55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)

12
 This function is not available for models of 0.75K or less. (0.4K or less for  This function is not available for the FL remote communication model.
single-phase 200V class)  This function is not available for the FL remote communication model and
 This function is available for the safety stop function model and the CC- the dedicated EtherCAT communication model.
Link communication model.  The output signal of the FL remote communication model, CC-Link


Features
This function is not available for the standard control circuit terminal communication model, and Dedicated EtherCAT communication model
model. have only one open collector output terminal. For the FL remote
 This operation guide is only available with option parameter unit (FR- communication model, the terminal is used only for the safety monitor
PU07). output signal (not selectable).
 This protective function is not available in the initial status.  This function is available for the safety stop function model (when
 This protective function is available with the three-phase power input equipped with the FR-E7DS), FL remote communication model, CC-Link
model only. communication model, and dedicated EtherCAT communication model.

Connection
example
 When using the inverters at the surrounding air temperature of 40°C or  This function is not available for the CC-Link communication model.
less, the inverters can be installed closely attached (0cm clearance).  For the CC-Link communication model, input signals can be assigned to
 Temperatures applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit. the input virtual terminals for CC-Link communication.

Specifications
Standard
Dimension
Drawings
Outline
Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection

Explanation
Diagram
Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
Parameter
List
Explanations

Parameters
of
Protective
Functions
Options
Instructions
Motor
Compatibility
Warranty
Inquiry

13
 Outline Dimensions

FR-E720-0.1K(SC) to 0.75K(SC)
FR-E720S-0.1K(SC) to 0.4K(SC)
FR-E710W-0.1K to 0.4K

φ5 hole When used with the plug-in option

5
118
128

Rating

Rating
plate

plate
Capacity
plate

4 4
5

5
56 D1 D1
68 D D2 ∗

Inverter Model D D1 D2 
FR-E720-0.1K, 0.2K
FR-E720S-0.1K, 0.2K 80.5 95.6
FR-E710W-0.1K 10
FR-E720-0.1KSC, 0.2KSC
86.5 108.1
FR-E720S-0.1KSC, 0.2KSC
FR-E710W-0.2K 110.5 10 125.6
FR-E720-0.4K 112.5 127.6
42
FR-E720-0.4KSC 118.5 140.1
FR-E720-0.75K 132.5 147.6
62
FR-E720-0.75KSC 138.5 160.1
FR-E720S-0.4K
142.5 157.6
FR-E710W-0.4K 42
FR-E720S-0.4KSC 148.5 170.1
 When the FR-A7NC (E kit) is used for the standard control terminal model, or
the FR-A7NC and the FR-A7NC E kit safety cover SC is used for the safety
stop function model, a terminal block protrudes forward, increasing the depth
by about 2mm (up to 2.8mm).
(Unit: mm)

14
FR-E720-1.5K(SC), 2.2K(SC)
FR-E720S-0.75K(SC), 1.5K(SC)
FR-E710W-0.75K

Features
When used with the plug-in option
2-φ5 hole

Connection
example
*1

Rating Rating

118
128
plate plate

Specifications
Standard
Capacity
plate

5 5

Dimension
5
5

Drawings
D1 D1

Outline
96
108 D D2*2
 FR-E710W-0.75K are not provided with the cooling fan.

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
Inverter Model D D1 D2 

Explanation
Diagram
FR-E720-1.5K, 2.2K
135.5 150.6
FR-E720S-0.75K
FR-E720-1.5KSC, 2.2KSC
141.5 60 163.1

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
FR-E720S-0.75KSC
FR-E720S-1.5K 161 176.1
FR-E720S-1.5KSC 167 188.6
FR-E710W-0.75K 155 54 170.1
 When the FR-A7NC (E kit) is used for the standard control terminal

Parameter
model, or the FR-A7NC and the FR-A7NC E kit safety cover SC is used

List
for the safety stop function model, a terminal block protrudes forward,
increasing the depth by about 2mm (up to 2.8mm).

(Unit: mm)

Explanations

Parameters
of
FR-E720-3.7K(SC)

When used with the plug-in option

Protective
Functions
2-φ5 hole
5

Options
Rating
118
128

Rating
plate plate
Capacity
plate Instructions

5 5 5
5

158 66.5 66.5

170 D D1 *
Motor

Inverter Model D D1 
FR-E720-3.7K 142.5 157.6
Compatibility

FR-E720-3.7KSC 148.5 170.1

 When the FR-A7NC (E kit) is used for the standard control
terminal model, or the FR-A7NC and the FR-A7NC E kit safety
cover SC is used for the safety stop function model, a terminal
block protrudes forward, increasing the depth by about 2mm
(up to 2.8mm).
Warranty

(Unit: mm)
Inquiry

15
 FR-E720-5.5K(SC) to 15K(SC)

When used with the plug-in option

2-φ6hole

8
244
260

Rating Rating
plate plate

D3 D3
8

6 W1 D2 D2
W D D1*
Capacity
plate

Inverter Model W W1 W2 D D1  D2 D3
FR-E720-5.5K, 7.5K 165 180.1
180 164 180 71.5 10
FR-E720-5.5KSC, 7.5KSC 171 192.6
FR-E720-11K, 15K 190 205.1
220 195 211 84.5 10.5
FR-E720-11KSC, 15KSC 196 217.6
 When the FR-A7NC (E kit) is used for the standard control terminal model, or the FR-A7NC and the FR-A7NC
E kit safety cover SC is used for the safety stop function model, a terminal block protrudes forward, increasing
the depth by about 2mm (up to 2.8mm).
W2
(Unit: mm)

16
FR-E740-0.4K(SC) to 3.7K(SC)
FR-E720S-2.2K(SC)

Features
When used with the plug-in option
2-φ5 hole

6
∗1 ∗1

Connection
example
138
150
Rating Rating
plate plate

Specifications
Capacity

Standard
plate

5 5
5

Dimension
6

Drawings
Outline
D1 D1
128
D D2 ∗2
140
 FR-E740-0.4K, 0.75K are not provided with the cooling fan.

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection

Explanation
Inverter Model D D1 D2 

Diagram
FR-E740-0.4K, 0.75K 114 129.1
39
FR-E740-0.4KSC, 0.75KSC 120 141.6

Operation panel

FR Configurator
FR-E740-1.5K to 3.7K 135 150.1

Parameter unit
FR-E740-1.5KSC to 3.7KSC 141 162.6
60
FR-E720S-2.2K 155.5 170.6
FR-E720S-2.2KSC 161.5 183.1
 When the FR-A7NC (E kit) is used for the standard control terminal model,

Parameter
or the FR-A7NC and the FR-A7NC E kit safety cover SC is used for the

List
safety stop function model, a terminal block protrudes forward, increasing
the depth by about 2mm (up to 2.8mm).

(Unit: mm)

Explanations

Parameters
FR-E740-5.5K(SC), 7.5K(SC)

of
When used with the plug-in option
2-φ5 hole
6

Protective
Functions
Options
150
138

Rating Rating
plate plate
Instructions

Capacity
plate
5 10 10
6

208 68 68
Motor

220 D D1∗
Compatibility

Inverter Model D D1 
FR-E740-5.5K, 7.5K 147 162.1
FR-E740-5.5KSC, 7.5KSC 153 174.6
 When the FR-A7NC (E kit) is used for the standard control terminal model, or
the FR-A7NC and the FR-A7NC E kit safety cover SC is used for the safety
Warranty

stop function model, a terminal block protrudes forward, increasing the depth
by about 2mm (up to 2.8mm).

(Unit: mm)
Inquiry

17
 FR-E740-11K(SC), 15K(SC)

When used with the plug-in option

8
2-φ6 hole

FAN FAN

244
260

Rating Rating
plate plate

6 10.5 10.5
8

195 84.5 84.5

220 Capacity D D1 *
plate

Inverter Model D D1 
FR-E740-11K, 15K 190 205.1
FR-E740-11KSC, 15KSC 196 217.6
 When the FR-A7NC (E kit) is used for the standard control terminal model, or
the FR-A7NC and the FR-A7NC E kit safety cover SC is used for the safety
stop function model, a terminal block protrudes forward, increasing the depth
by about 2mm (up to 2.8mm).

211
(Unit: mm)

18
FL remote communication model

FR-E720-0.1KNF to 0.75KNF FR-E720-1.5KNF to 15KNF

Features
FR-E740-0.4KNF to 15KNF

φC hole
φC hole

Connection
example
H1

H1
H

Specifications
Standard
W1

Dimension
W1

Drawings
Outline
W D
W
(Unit: mm)
 Three-phase 200V class  Three-phase 400V class

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
Inverter Model W W1 H H1 D C Inverter Model W W1 H H1 D C

Explanation
Diagram
FR-E720-0.1KNF FR-E740-0.4KNF
89.5 123
FR-E720-0.2KNF FR-E740-0.75KNF
68 56
FR-E720-0.4KNF 121.5 FR-E740-1.5KNF 140 128

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
FR-E720-0.75KNF 128 118 141.5 5 FR-E740-2.2KNF 150 138 144 5
FR-E720-1.5KNF FR-E740-3.7KNF
108 96 144.5
FR-E720-2.2KNF FR-E740-5.5KNF
208 156
FR-E720-3.7KNF 170 158 151.5 FR-E740-7.5KNF
220
FR-E720-5.5KNF FR-E740-11KNF

Parameter
180 164 174 195 260 244 199 6
FR-E720-7.5KNF FR-E740-15KNF

List
260 244 6
FR-E720-11KNF
220 195 199
FR-E720-15KNF

Explanations

Parameters
of
CC-Link communication model

FR-E720-0.1KNC to 0.75KNC FR-E720-1.5KNC to 15KNC

Protective
Functions
FR-E740-0.4KNC to 15KNC
φC
φC

Options
H1

H1
H

Instructions

W1 W1
D
Motor

W W
(Unit: mm)
 Three-phase 200V class  Three-phase 400V class
Compatibility

Inverter Model W W1 H H1 D C Inverter Model W W1 H H1 D C

FR-E720-0.1KNC FR-E740-0.4KNC
108 141.5
FR-E720-0.2KNC FR-E740-0.75KNC
68 56
FR-E720-0.4KNC 140 FR-E740-1.5KNC 140 128
FR-E720-0.75KNC 128 118 160 5 FR-E740-2.2KNC 150 138 162.5 5
Warranty

FR-E720-1.5KNC FR-E740-3.7KNC
108 96 163
FR-E720-2.2KNC FR-E740-5.5KNC
208 174.5
FR-E720-3.7KNC 170 158 170 FR-E740-7.5KNC
220
FR-E720-5.5KNC FR-E740-11KNC
180 164 192.5 195 260 244 217.5 6
FR-E720-7.5KNC FR-E740-15KNC
Inquiry

260 244 6
FR-E720-11KNC
220 195 217.5
FR-E720-15KNC

19
 Ethernet communication function model

FR-E720-0.1K to 0.75K-NE FR-E720-1.5K to 15K-NE

FR-E720S-0.1K to 0.4K-NE FR-E740-0.4K to 15K-NE
FR-E720S-0.75K to 2.2K-NE
φC
φC
H1

H1
H

H
W1 W1
W W D
(Unit: mm)
 Three-phase 200V class  Three-phase 400V class
Inverter Model W W1 H H1 D C Inverter Model W W1 H H1 D C
FR-E720-0.1K-NE FR-E740-0.4K-NE
108 141.5
FR-E720-0.2K-NE FR-E740-0.75K-NE
68 56
FR-E720-0.4K-NE 140 FR-E740-1.5K-NE 140 128
FR-E720-0.75K-NE 128 118 160 5 FR-E740-2.2K-NE 150 138 162.5 5
FR-E720-1.5K-NE FR-E740-3.7K-NE
108 96 163
FR-E720-2.2K-NE FR-E740-5.5K-NE
208 174.5
FR-E720-3.7K-NE 170 158 170 FR-E740-7.5K-NE
220
FR-E720-5.5K-NE FR-E740-11K-NE
180 164 192.5 195 260 244 217.5 6
FR-E720-7.5K-NE FR-E740-15K-NE
260 244 6
FR-E720-11K-NE
220 195 217.5
FR-E720-15K-NE

 Single-phase 200V class

Inverter Model W W1 H H1 D C
FR-E720S-0.1K-NE
108
FR-E720S-0.2K-NE 68 56
FR-E720S-0.4K-NE 128 118 170
5
FR-E720S-0.75K-NE 163
108 96
FR-E720S-1.5K-NE 188.5
FR-E720S-2.2K-NE 140 128 150 138 183

20
Dedicated EtherCAT communication model
By installing the EtherCAT communication option (E7NECT_2P manufactured by HMS Industrial Networks AB), EtherCAT
communication is possible.

Features
FR-E720-0.1K to 0.75KSC-TM FR-E720-1.5K to 15KSC-TM
FR-E740-0.4K to 15KSC-TM

Connection
example
φC
φC

Specifications
Standard
H1

H1
H

Dimension
Drawings
Outline
W1 W1
W W D

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
(Unit: mm)

Explanation
Diagram
 Three-phase 200V class  Three-phase 400V class
Inverter Model W W1 H H1 D C Inverter Model W W1 H H1 D C
FR-E720-0.1KSC-TM FR-E740-0.4KSC-TM

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
108 141.5
FR-E720-0.2KSC-TM FR-E740-0.75KSC-TM
68 56
FR-E720-0.4KSC-TM 140 FR-E740-1.5KSC-TM 140 128
FR-E720-0.75KSC-TM 128 118 160 5 FR-E740-2.2KSC-TM 150 138 162.5 5
FR-E720-1.5KSC-TM FR-E740-3.7KSC-TM
108 96 163

Parameter
FR-E720-2.2KSC-TM FR-E740-5.5KSC-TM
208 174.5

List
FR-E720-3.7KSC-TM 170 158 170 FR-E740-7.5KSC-TM
220
FR-E720-5.5KSC-TM FR-E740-11KSC-TM
180 164 192.5 195 260 244 217.5 6
FR-E720-7.5KSC-TM FR-E740-15KSC-TM
260 244 6

Explanations

Parameters
FR-E720-11KSC-TM
220 195 217.5
FR-E720-15KSC-TM

of
Protective
Functions
Options
Instructions
Motor
Compatibility
Warranty
Inquiry

21
 Parameter unit (option) (FR-PU07)
<Outline drawing> <Panel cut dimension drawing>
25.05
(14.2) (11.45)
83

2.5
40 40

*1
*1

Air-bleeding

50

51
hole
4-R1
*1
*1
135

67

56.8

57.8
26.5 26.5 4-φ4 hole
(Effective depth of the
installation screw hole 5.0)
M3 screw *2
 When installing the FR-PU07 on the enclosure, etc., remove
screws or fix the screws to the FR-PU07 with M3 nuts.
 Select the installation screw whose length will not exceed the
80.3
effective depth of the installation screw hole. (Unit: mm)

Parameter unit with battery pack (option) (FR-PU07BB)

83
<Outline drawing>
8.2 46.7
18
6
135

44.7
46.7

(Unit: mm)
Enclosure surface operation panel (option) (FR-PA07)
<Outline drawing> <Panel cut dimension drawing>
22
68
22

59
2-M3 screw

(Unit: mm)

22
Terminal Connection Diagram

(1) Standard control circuit terminal model

l

*1. DC reactor (FR-HEL)

Features
Sink logic
When connecting a DC reactor, remove the
Main circuit terminal jumper across P1 and P/+. *6 Terminal P1 is not available for
Control circuit terminal Not available for single-phase 100V power single-phase 100V power input model.
input model.
Single-phase power input Brake unit *7 A brake transistor is not built-in to the 0.1K

Connection
and 0.2K.

example
MCCB MC (Option)
*1
Single-phase R/L1 R *8 Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS, MYS type)
AC power Earth Install a thermal relay to prevent an
S/L2 (Ground) *8
supply overheat and burnout of the brake resistor.
(The brake resistor cannot be connected

Specifications
Jumper PR N/-
to the 0.1K and 0.2K.)

Standard
MCCB MC P1 P/+ *7
*6 Motor
Three-phase R/L1 U
AC power S/L2 V
IM
supply T/L3 W

Dimension
Drawings
Outline
Earth
(Ground)
Main circuit Earth (Ground)
Control circuit

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection

Explanation
Diagram
Standard control terminal block
Control input signals (No voltage input allowed) C Relay output
Forward STF
Terminal functions vary

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Terminal functions vary rotation start

Parameter unit
B Relay output by Pr. 192 A,B,C terminal
with the input terminal Reverse STR
assignment (Pr. 178 to rotation start (Fault output) function selection
A
Pr. 184) RH
High
speed
Open collector output

Parameter
Multi-speed selection Middle RM

List
speed Terminal functions vary with
*2 When using terminals RUN
Low RL the output terminal assignment
PC-SD as a 24VDC Running
speed (Pr. 190 and Pr. 191)
power supply, take care MRS
not to short across Output FU

Explanations

Parameters
terminals PC-SD. stop Frequency detection
SOURCE

RES
SINK

of
Reset
SD SE Open collector output common
Contact input common Sink/source common
24VDC power supply PC *2

Protective
Functions
(Common for external power supply transistor) Calibration resistor
Indicator
+ - (Frequency meter, etc.)
Frequency setting signals (Analog)
3 10(+5V) FM Moving-coil type
*3 Terminal input specifications Frequency 1mA full-scale
can be changed by analog *9

Options
setting 2 0 to 5VDC *3 SD
input specifications
potentiometer 2
switchover (Pr. 73). (0 to 10VDC)
1/2W1kΩ *9 It is not necessary when calibrating the
indicator from the operation panel.
*4 It is recommended to use 2W1kΩ *4 5(Analog common) PU
when the frequency setting signal 1 connector
Instructions

is changed frequently. *10 Operation and parameter setting can be

done from the parameter unit (FR-PU07)
Terminal 4 input (+) 4 4 to 20mADC *10 and the enclosure surface operation panel
(Current input) (-) 0 to 5VDC (FR-PA07).
*5 Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog 0 to 10VDC *5 (Use the option cable (FR-CB2 ).)
input specifications switchover (Pr. 267). Set the RS-485 communication can be utilized from
voltage/current input switch in the "V" position to select a personal computer and other devices.
voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to10V) and "I" (initial value) to I V
Motor

select current input (4 to 20mA).

To use terminal 4 (initial setting is current input), set "4" Voltage/current *11 A personal computer and an inverter can be
USB
in any of Pr.178 to Pr.184 (input terminal function selection) input switch *5 connected with a USB (Ver1.1) cable.
to assign the function, and turn ON AU signal. connector You can perform parameter setting and
monitoring with the FR Configurator (FR-
Compatibility

*11 SW3-SETUP-W ).
Connector for Option connector
plug-in option connection

Note
Warranty

 To prevent a malfunction caused by noise, separate the signal cables more than 10cm from the power cables. Also
separate the main circuit wire of the input side and the output side.
 After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Inquiry

Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes
in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
 The output of the single-phase power input model is three-phase 200V.

23
 (2) Safety stop function model

Sink logic
Main circuit terminal *1. DC reactor (FR-HEL)
Control circuit terminal When connecting a DC reactor, remove the
jumper across P1 and P/+.
Single-phase power input Brake unit *6 A brake transistor is not built-in to the 0.1K
(Option) and 0.2K.
MCCB MC
*1
Single-phase R/L1 R *7 Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS, MYS type)
AC power Earth Install a thermal relay to prevent an
S/L2 (Ground) *7
supply overheat and burnout of the brake resistor.
Jumper PR N/- (The brake resistor cannot be connected
to the 0.1K and 0.2K.)
MCCB MC P1 P/+ *6
Motor
Three-phase R/L1 U
AC power S/L2 V
IM
supply T/L3 W

Earth
(Ground)
Main circuit Earth (Ground)

Control circuit Safety stop function model

Control input signals (No voltage input allowed)
STF C Relay output
Forward
Terminal functions vary rotation start Terminal functions vary
with the input terminal Reverse STR B by Pr. 192 A,B,C terminal
Relay output
assignment (Pr. 178 to rotation start (Fault output) function selection
Pr. 182 and Pr. 184) RH A
High
speed
Multi-speed selection Middle RM
Open collector output
speed
*2 When using terminals
Low RL RUN Terminal functions vary with
PC-SD as a 24VDC
power supply, take care speed Running the output terminal assignment
SOURCE

RES (Pr. 190 and Pr. 191)

SINK

not to short across

terminals PC-SD. Reset FU
SD Frequency detection
Contact input common
24VDC power supply PC *2
(Common for external power supply transistor) SE Open collector output common
Safety stop input common terminal Sink/source common
S1
Safety stop input (Channel 1)
S2
Safety stop input (Channel 2) Calibration resistor
Shorting wire Indicator
+ - (Frequency meter, etc.)
Frequency setting signals (Analog)
3 10(+5V) FM Moving-coil type
*3 Terminal input specifications Frequency 1mA full-scale
can be changed by analog setting *8
input specifications 2 2 0 to 5VDC *3 SD
switchover (Pr. 73). potentiometer (0 to 10VDC)
1/2W1kΩ *8 It is not necessary when calibrating the
PU indicator from the operation panel.
*4 It is recommended to use 2W1kΩ *4 5(Analog common)
when the frequency setting signal 1 connector *9 Operation and parameter setting can be
is changed frequently.
done from the parameter unit (FR-PU07)
Terminal 4 input (+) 4 4 to 20mADC *9 and the enclosure surface operation panel
(Current input) (-) 0 to 5VDC (FR-PA07).
*5 Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog 0 to 10VDC *5 (Use the option cable (FR-CB2 ).)
input specifications switchover (Pr. 267). Set the RS-485 communication can be utilized from
voltage/current input switch in the "V" position to select a personal computer and other devices.
voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to10V) and "I" (initial value) to V I
select current input (4 to 20mA).
To use terminal 4 (initial setting is current input), set "4" Voltage/current *10 A personal computer and an inverter can be
USB
in any of Pr.178 to Pr.184 (input terminal function selection) input switch *5 connected with a USB (Ver1.1) cable.
to assign the function, and turn ON AU signal. connector

*10
Connector for Option connector
plug-in option connection

Note
 To prevent a malfunction caused by noise, separate the signal cables more than 10cm from the power cables. Also
separate the main circuit wire of the input side and the output side.
 After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes
in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
 The output of the single-phase power input model is three-phase 200V.

24
(3) FL remote communication model (NF)

Sink logic *1. DC reactor (FR-HEL)

Features
Main circuit terminal When connecting a DC reactor, remove the
Control circuit terminal jumper across P1-P/+.

Brake unit *2 A brake transistor is not built-in to the 0.1K

(Option) and 0.2K.

Connection
example
*1 R *3 Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS, MYS type)
Earth Install a thermal relay to prevent an
(Ground) *3
overheat and burnout of the brake resistor.
Jumper PR N/- (The brake resistor cannot be connected
to the 0.1K and 0.2K.)

Specifications
*2

Standard
MCCB MC P1 P/+
Motor
R/L1 U
Three-phase
AC power S/L2 V
IM
supply T/L3 W

Dimension
Drawings
Outline
Earth Main circuit Earth (Ground)
(Ground)
Control circuit

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection

Explanation
24V external power supply Open collector output

Diagram
24V power supply +24 Y0
SD Open collector output Y0
(Safety monitor output 2)

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
Common terminal
SE Open collector output common
Sink/source common
Safety stop signal Shorting
wire S1
Safety stop input (Channel 1)

Parameter
S2

List
Safety stop input (Channel 2)

PC
Safety stop input common

Explanations

Parameters
of
FL remote
communication
connector

Protective
Functions
Node address setting D1 D2 LED (operation status display)
X1 X10 D1: Communication setting status LED (CHG)
23 23
D3 D4 D2: Device status LED (DEV)
901
456

901
456

D3: Reception/transmission LED (TX/RX)

78 78

D4: Remote status LED (RMT)

Note Options

 To prevent a malfunction caused by noise, separate the signal cables more than 10cm from the power cables. Also
Instructions

separate the main circuit wire of the input side and the output side.
 After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes
in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
Motor
Compatibility
Warranty
Inquiry

25
 (4) CC-Link communication model (NC)

Sink logic *1. DC reactor (FR-HEL)

Main circuit terminal When connecting a DC reactor, remove the
Control circuit terminal jumper across P1 and P/+.

Brake unit *2 A brake transistor is not built-in to the 0.1K

(Option) and 0.2K.
*1 R *3 Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS, MYS type)
Earth Install a thermal relay to prevent an
*3
(Ground) overheat and burnout of the brake resistor.
PR N/- (The brake resistor cannot be connected
Jumper to the 0.1K and 0.2K.)
MCCB MC P1 P/+ *2
Motor
R/L1 U
Three-phase
S/L2 V
AC power IM
supply T/L3 W

Earth Main circuit Earth (Ground)

(Ground)
Control circuit
24V external power supply Open collector output
Use Pr. 190 RX2 (Y0 terminal)
24V power supply +24
function selection to change the
SD function assigned to the terminal.
Common terminal Y0
Open collector output Y0
(While the inverter is running)
Safety stop signal Shorting SE Open collector output common
wire S1
Safety stop input (Channel 1) Sink/source common
S2
Safety stop input (Channel 2)
24V *4 A personal computer and an inverter can be
USB connected with a USB (Ver1.1) cable.
PC connector You can perform parameter setting and
Safety stop input common
monitoring with the FR Configurator (FR-
*4
SW3-SETUP-W ).

CC-Link LED (operation status indicator)

communication SD L.RUN
connector LEDs turn ON/OFF to indicate
(2-port type) RD L.ERR the operation status.
RUN

Note
 To prevent a malfunction caused by noise, separate the signal cables more than 10cm from the power cables. Also
separate the main circuit wire of the input side and the output side.
 After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes
in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.

26
(5) Ethernet communication function model (-NE)

Sink logic *1. DC reactor (FR-HEL)

Features
When connecting a DC reactor, remove the
Main circuit terminal jumper across P1-P/+.
Control circuit terminal

Single-phase power input Brake unit

*6 A brake transistor is not built-in to the
0.1K and 0.2K.

Connection
MCCB MC (Option)

example
*1 *7 Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS, MYS type)
Single-phase R/L1 R
AC power Earth Install a thermal relay to prevent an
S/L2 (Ground) *7
supply overheat and burnout of the brake resistor.
(The brake resistor cannot be connected
Jumper PR N/-

Specifications
to the 0.1K and 0.2K.)

Standard
MCCB MC P1 P/+ *6
Motor
Three-phase R/L1 U
AC power S/L2 V
IM
supply T/L3 W

Dimension
Drawings
Outline
Earth
(Ground)
Main circuit Earth (Ground)
Control circuit

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection

Explanation
Standard control terminal block

Diagram
Control input signals (No voltage input allowed) C Relay output
Forward STF
Terminal functions vary rotation start Terminal functions vary

Operation panel

FR Configurator
B

Parameter unit
with the input terminal Reverse Relay output by Pr. 192 A,B,C terminal
STR function selection
assignment (Pr. 178 to rotation start (Fault output)
A
Pr. 184) RH
High
speed
RM Open collector output

Parameter
Multi-speed selection Middle
speed

List
RUN Terminal functions vary with
*2 When using terminals PC RL
Low Running the output terminal assignment
and SD as a 24VDC
speed (Pr. 190 and Pr. 191)
power supply, take care MRS
not to short across Output FU

Explanations

Parameters
terminals PC and SD. stop Frequency detection
SOURCE

RES
SINK

of
Reset
SD SE Open collector output common
Contact input common Sink/source common
24VDC power supply PC *2

Protective
Functions
(Common for external power supply transistor) Calibration resistor
Indicator
+ - (Frequency meter, etc.)
Frequency setting signals (Analog)
3 10(+5V) FM Moving-coil type
*3 Terminal input specifications Frequency 1mA full-scale
can be changed by analog setting *8
2 0 to 5VDC *3

Options
2 SD
input specifications potentiometer
switchover (Pr. 73). (0 to 10VDC)
1/2W1kΩ *8 It is not necessary when calibrating the
indicator from the operation panel.
*4 It is recommended to use 2W1kΩ *4 1 5(Analog common) PU
when the frequency setting signal connector *9 Operation and parameter setting can be
Instructions

is changed frequently. done from the parameter unit (FR-PU07)

*9 and the enclosure surface operation panel
Terminal 4 input (+) 4 4 to 20mADC (FR-PA07).
(Current input) (-) 0 to 5VDC (Use the option cable (FR-CB2 ).)
0 to 10VDC *5 RS-485 communication can be utilized from
*5 Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog
a personal computer and other devices.
input specifications switchover (Pr. 267). Set the
voltage/current input switch in the "V" position to select I V
Motor

voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to10V) and "I" (initial value) to

select current input (4 to 20mA).
Voltage/current *10 A personal computer and an inverter can be
USB
To use terminal 4 (initial setting is current input), set "4" input switch *5 connected with a USB (Ver1.1) cable.
in any of Pr.178 to Pr.184 (input terminal function selection)
connector
You can perform parameter setting and
to assign the function, and turn ON AU signal. monitoring with the FR Configurator2
*10
Compatibility

(SW1DND-FRC2- ).
Ethernet
connector
Warranty

Note
 To prevent a malfunction caused by noise, separate the signal cables more than 10cm from the power cables. Also
separate the main circuit wire of the input side and the output side.
 After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Inquiry

Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes
in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
 The output of the single-phase power input model is three-phase 200V.

27
 (6) Dedicated EtherCAT communication model (-TM)
By installing the EtherCAT communication option (E7NECT_2P manufactured by HMS Industrial Networks AB), EtherCAT
communication is possible.

*1. DC reactor (FR-HEL)

Main circuit terminal When connecting a DC reactor, remove the
jumper across P1 and P/+.
Control circuit terminal

*2 A brake transistor is not built-in to the

Brake unit
(Option)
0.1K and 0.2K.
*1 R *3 Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS, MYS type)
Earth Install a thermal relay to prevent an
(Ground) *3
overheat and burnout of the brake resistor.
(The brake resistor cannot be connected
Jumper PR N/-
to the 0.1K and 0.2K.)
MCCB MC P1 P/+ *2
Motor
Three-phase R/L1 U
AC power S/L2 V
IM
supply T/L3 W

Earth
(Ground)
Main circuit Earth (Ground)
Control circuit
24V external power supply Open collector output
Use Pr.190 Y0 terminal function
24V power supply +24 selection to change the function
SD assigned to the terminal.
Common terminal Y0
Open collector output Y0
(Inverter running)

Safety stop signal Shorting SE

wire S1 Open collector output common
Safety stop input (Channel 1)
S2
Safety stop input (Channel 2)
24V
USB
PC
Safety stop input common connector

EtherCAT communication
option connector

Note
 To prevent a malfunction caused by noise, separate the signal cables more than 10cm from the power cables. Also
separate the main circuit wire of the input side and the output side.
 After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes
in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.

28
Terminal Specifications

(1) Standard control circuit terminal model, safety stop function model (SC)

Terminal
Type Terminal Name Description
Symbol

Features
Connect to the commercial power supply. Keep these terminals open when using the high power
R/L1, S/L2,
AC power input factor converter (FR-HC2) or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV).
T/L3   When using single-phase power input, terminals are R/L1 and S/L2.
U, V, W Inverter output Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor.

Connection
Brake resistor Connect a brake transistor (MRS type, MYS type, FR-ABR) across terminals P/+-PR.

example
P/+, PR
Main circuit

connection (The brake resistor cannot be connected to the 0.1K or 0.2K)

Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2), power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) or high power
Brake unit connection factor converter (FR-HC2).
P/+, N/-
DC power input Connect the plus side of the power supply to terminal P/+ and minus side to terminal N/-.

Specifications
Remove the jumper across terminals P/+-P1 and connect a DC reactor. Single-phase 100V power

Standard
P/+, P1  DC reactor connection input model is not compatible with DC reactor.
 Terminal P1 is not available for single-phase 100V power input model.

Earth (Ground) For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Must be earthed (grounded).

STF Forward rotation start Turn on the STF signal to start forward rotation and turn it off to stop. When the STF and STR signals

Dimension
Drawings
Outline
are turned on simultaneously,
STR Reverse rotation start Turn on the STR signal to start reverse rotation and turn it off to stop. the stop command is given.
RH, RM, RL Multi-speed selection Multi-speed can be selected according to the combination of RH, RM and RL signals.
Turn on the MRS signal (20ms or more) to stop the inverter output.
MRS  Output stop Use to shut off the inverter output when stopping the motor by electromagnetic brake.

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
 Terminal MRS is only available for the standard control circuit terminal model.

Explanation
Diagram
Use to reset alarm output provided when protective circuit is activated. Turn on the RES signal for
RES Reset more than 0.1s, then turn it off. It is possible to set the initial setting to "always enabled". By setting Pr.
75, reset can be set enabled only at fault occurrence. Recover about 1s after reset is cancelled.
Contact input common
Contact input

Common terminal for contact input terminal (sink logic) and terminal FM.

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
(sink) (initial setting)
Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a transistor output (open collector
External transistor
SD output) device, such as a programmable controller, in the source logic to avoid malfunction by
common (source) undesirable currents.
24VDC power supply Common output terminal for 24VDC 0.1A power supply (PC terminal).
common Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.

Parameter
External transistor Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a transistor output (open collector

List
common output) device, such as a programmable controller, in the sink logic to avoid malfunction by
(sink) (initial setting) undesirable currents.
Control circuit/input signal

Contact input common

Common terminal for contact input terminal (source logic).
PC (source)

Explanations

Parameters
24VDC power supply Can be used as 24VDC 0.1A power supply.

of
Common terminal for safety stop input terminals S1 and S2.
Safety stop input
 Terminals S1 and S2 are provided on the safety stop function model. For details, refer to the Safety
terminal common  stop function instruction manual (BCN-A211508-004).
5VDC
Frequency setting Used as power supply when connecting potentiometer for frequency setting

Protective
10

Functions
permissible load
power supply (speed setting) from outside of the inverter.
current 10mA
Inputting 0 to 5VDC (or 0 to 10V) provides the maximum output
Input resistance 10k ± 1k
Frequency setting frequency at 5V (10V) and makes input and output proportional.
2 Permissible maximum voltage
(voltage) Use Pr. 73 to switch between input 0 to 5VDC (initial setting) and 0
20VDC
to 10VDC input.

Options
Inputting 0 to 20mADC (or 0 to 5V / 0 to 10V) provides the
maximum output frequency at 20mA makes input and output
Frequency setting

proportional. This input signal is valid only when the AU signal is on

(terminal 2 input is invalid). To use terminal 4 (initial setting is
current input), set "4" to any of Pr.178 to Pr.184 (input terminal Voltage input:
function selection), and turn AU signal ON. Use Pr. 267 to switch from Input resistance 10k ± 1k
Instructions

among input 4 to 20mA (initial setting), 0 to 5VDC and 0 to 10VDC. Permissible maximum voltage
Frequency setting Set the voltage/current input switch in the "V" position to select 20VDC
4 voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to 10V).
(current) Current input:
Standard control circuit Safety stop function Input resistance 233 ± 5
terminal model model Maximum permissible current
30mA.
Motor

Current input Current input

(initial status) Voltage input (initial status) Voltage input

Frequency setting
Compatibility

5 Common terminal for the frequency setting signals (terminals 2 or 4). Do not earth (ground).
common
S1/S2 are safe stop signals for use with in conjunction with an
approved external safety unit. Both S1/S2 must be used in dual
Safe stop input channel form. Inverter output is shutoff depending on shorting/
S1 Input resistance 4.7kW
(Channel 1) 
Safety stop

opening between S1 and PC, S2 and PC.

Voltage when contacts are open
In the initial status, terminal S1 and S2 are shorted with terminal PC
Warranty

21 to 26VDC
by shortening wire.
Current when contacts are
Remove the shortening wire and connect the safety relay module
short-circuited
Safe stop input when using the safety stop function.
S2 4 to 6mADC
(Channel 2)   Terminals S1 and S2 are provided on the safety stop function
model. For details, refer to the Safety stop function instruction
manual (BCN-A211508-004).
Inquiry

29
 Terminal
Type Terminal Name Description
Symbol
1 changeover contact output indicates that the inverter fault occurs.
Relay

Relay output
A, B, C Fault: discontinuity across B-C (continuity across A-C), Normal: continuity across B-C (discontinuity
(fault output) across A-C) Contact capacity 230VAC 0.3A (power factor = 0.4) 30VDC 0.3A
Control circuit/output signal

The output is in LOW state when the inverter output frequency is Permissible load 24VDC
equal to or higher than the starting frequency (initial value: 0.5Hz). (Maximum 27VDC) 0.1A
RUN Inverter running The output is in HIGH state during stop or DC injection brake (a voltage drop is 3.4V
Open collector

operation.  maximum when the signal is on)

 An open collector transistor is
The output is in LOW state when the inverter output frequency is ON (conductive) in LOW
FU Frequency detection equal to or higher than the preset detection frequency, and is in state. The transistor is OFF
HIGH state when it is less than the preset detection frequency.  (not conductive) in HIGH
state.
Open collector
SE Common terminal of terminal RUN and FU.
output common
Select one e.g. output frequency from monitor items. (Not output
Pulse

Permissible load current 1mA

FM For meter during inverter reset.)The output signal is proportional to the
1440 pulses/s at 60Hz
magnitude of the corresponding monitoring item.
With the PU connector, RS-485 communication can be made.
Communication

— PU connector · Conforming standard: EIA-485 (RS-485) · Transmission format: Multi-drop link

· Communication speed: 4800 to 38400bps · Overall extension: 500m
USB connection with a personal computer can be established. Setting, monitoring and testing of the
inverter can be performed using FR Configurator.
— USB connector · Interface: conforms to USB1.1 · Transmission Speed: 12Mbps
· Connector: USB mini B connector (receptacle mini B type)

Note
 Set Pr. 267 and a voltage/current input switch correctly, then input an analog signal in accordance with the setting. Applying
a voltage with voltage/current input switch in "I" position (current input is selected) or a current with switch in "V" position
(voltage input is selected) could cause component damage of the inverter or analog circuit of output devices.
 The inverter will be damaged if power is applied to the inverter output terminals (U, V, W). Never perform such wiring.
 indicates that terminal functions can be selected using Pr. 178 to Pr. 192 (I/O terminal function selection).
 Terminal names and terminal functions are those of the factory set.
 When connecting the DC power supply, be sure to connect the plus side of the power supply to terminal P/+ and
minus side to terminal N/-. Opposite polarity will damage the inverter.

30
(2) FL remote communication model (NF), CC-Link communication model (NC)

Terminal
Type Terminal Name Description

Features
Symbol
R/L1, S/L2,
AC power input Connect to a commercial power supply.
T/L3
U, V, W Inverter output Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor.
Main circuit

Connection
example
Connect a brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS type, MYS type) across terminals P/+ and PR.
P/+, PR Brake resistor connection (The brake resistor cannot be connected to the 0.1K or 0.2K.)

P/+, N/- Brake unit connection Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2).
P/+, P1 DC reactor connection Remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 and connect a DC reactor.

Specifications
Standard
Earth (Ground) For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Must be earthed (grounded).
24V external power supply

Input voltage
Even when the main circuit power supply is OFF, FL-net
24V external power 23.5 to 26.5VDC

Dimension
+24 communication continues with the input from the 24V external

Drawings
supply

Outline
Input current
power supply.
0.7A or less

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection

Explanation
24V external power

Diagram
SD Common terminal for the terminal +24
supply common terminal

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
Terminal S1/S2 are safety stop signals for use with in conjunction
Safety stop input with an approved external safety unit. Both terminal S1/S2 must be Input resistance 4.7kΩ
S1
Safety stop function

(Channel 1) used in dual channel form. Voltage when contacts are open
Inverter output is shutoff depending on shorting/opening between 21 to 26VDC
Control circuit

S1 and PC, S2 and PC. Current when contacts are

Safety stop input In the initial status, terminal S1 and S2 are shorted with terminal short-circuited
S2

Parameter
(Channel 2) PC by shorting wire. Remove the shorting wire and connect the 4 to 6mADC
safety relay module when using the safety stop function.

List
Safety stop input terminal
PC Common terminal for safety stop input terminals S1 and S2.
common

Explanations

Parameters
FL remote communication model (NF)

of
Open collector output Y0 The output is switched to HIGH state to activate the safety stop Permissible load 24VDC
function when the safety circuit fault (E.SAF) occurs. Otherwise, (maximum 27VDC) 0.1A
(safety monitor output 2) the output is in LOW state.  (a voltage drop is 3.4V
Open collector

maximum when the signal is on)

Protective
CC-Link communication model (NC)

Functions
Y0  The open collector transistor
The output is in LOW state when the inverter output frequency is is ON (conductive) in LOW
equal to or higher than the starting frequency (initial value: 0.5Hz). state. The transistor is OFF
Open collector output Y0 The output is in HIGH state during stop or DC injection brake (not conductive) in HIGH
(Inverter running) operation.  state.
Use Pr. 190 RX2 (terminal Y0) function selection to change the

Options
function assigned to the terminal.
Open collector output
SE Common terminal of terminal Y0.
common
FL remote communication model (NF)
Instructions
FL-net

FL remote communication connector With the FL remote communication connector, FL remote communication can be performed.

CC-Link communication model (NC)

Pin arrangement
Motor

5 4 3 2 1
Communication

CONA Pin number 5 4 3 2 1

Signal name SLD NC DG DB DA
CONB
CC-Link

Compatibility

CONA
CC-Link communication
connector
CONB One-touch connector for CC-Link communication
Model name Manufacturer
A6CON-L5P Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
Warranty

35505-6000-B0M GF 3M Japan Limited

The FR Configurator can be operated by connecting the inverter to the personal computer through USB.
— USB connector · Interface: conforms to USB1.1 · Transmission Speed: 12Mbps
· Connector: USB mini B connector (receptacle mini B type)
Inquiry

Note
 The inverter will be damaged if power is applied to the inverter output terminals (U, V, W). Never perform such wiring.
 When connecting the DC power supply, be sure to connect the plus side of the power supply to terminal P/+ and
minus side to terminal N/-. Opposite polarity will damage the inverter.

31
 (3) Ethernet communication function model (-NE)

Terminal
Type Terminal Name Description
Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, Connect to the commercial power supply. Keep these terminals open when using the high power
AC power input
T/L3 * factor converter (FR-HC2) or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV).
U, V, W Inverter output Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor.
Brake resistor Connect a brake resistor (MRS type, MYS type, FR-ABR) across terminals P/+ and PR.
Main circuit

P/+, PR
connection (The brake resistor cannot be connected to the 0.1K or 0.2K)
Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2), power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) or high power
Brake unit connection
P/+, N/- factor converter (FR-HC2).
DC power input Connect the plus side of the power supply to terminal P/+ and minus side to terminal N/-.
P/+, P1 DC reactor connection Remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 and connect a DC reactor.

Earth (Ground) For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Must be earthed (grounded).

Turn ON the STF signal to start forward rotation and turn it OFF to
STF Forward rotation start When the STF and STR signals
stop.
are turned ON simultaneously,
Turn ON the STR signal to start reverse rotation and turn it OFF to
STR Reverse rotation start the stop command is given.
stop.
RH, RM, RL Multi-speed selection Multi-speed can be selected according to the combination of RH, RM and RL signals.
Turn ON the MRS signal (20ms or more) to stop the inverter output.
MRS Output stop
Use to shut off the inverter output when stopping the motor by electromagnetic brake.
Used to reset alarm output provided when protective circuit is activated. Turn ON the RES signal for
RES Reset more than 0.1s, then turn it OFF. Initial setting is for reset always. By setting Pr. 75, reset can be set to
enabled only at fault occurrence. Recover about 1s after reset is cancelled.
Contact input

Contact input common

Common terminal for contact input terminal (sink logic) and terminal FM.
(sink) (initial setting)
Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a transistor output (open collector
External transistor
SD output) device, such as a programmable controller, in the source logic to avoid malfunction by
common (source)
undesirable current.
24VDC power supply Common output terminal for 24VDC 0.1A power supply (PC terminal).
common Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.
Control circuit/input signal

External transistor Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a transistor output (open collector
common output) device, such as a programmable controller, in the sink logic to avoid malfunction by
(sink) (initial setting) undesirable current.
PC
Contact input common
Common terminal for contact input terminal (source logic).
(source)
24VDC power supply Can be used as 24VDC 0.1A power supply.
Frequency setting Used as power supply when connecting potentiometer for 5VDC
10
power supply frequency setting (speed setting) from outside of the inverter. permissible load current 10mA
Inputting 0 to 5VDC (or 0 to 10V) provides the maximum output
Input resistance 10k ± 1k
Frequency setting frequency at 5V (10V) and makes input and output proportional.
2 Permissible maximum voltage
(voltage) Use Pr. 73 to switch between input 0 to 5VDC (initial setting) and 0
20VDC
to 10VDC input.
Inputting 0 to 20mADC (or 0 to 5V / 0 to 10V) provides the
Frequency setting

maximum output frequency at 20mA and makes input and output

proportional. This input signal is valid only when the AU signal is
ON (terminal 2 input is invalid). To use terminal 4 (initial setting is Voltage input:
current input), set "4" to any of Pr.178 to Pr.184 (input terminal Input resistance 10k ± 1k
function selection), and turn AU signal ON. Use Pr. 267 to switch Permissible maximum voltage
Frequency setting among input 4 to 20mA (initial setting), 0 to 5VDC, and 0 to 10VDC. 20VDC
4
(current) Set the voltage/current input switch in the "V" position to select Current input:
voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to 10V). Input resistance 233 ± 5
Maximum permissible current
Current input 30mA.
(initial status) Voltage input

Frequency setting
5 Common terminal for the frequency setting signals (terminals 2 and 4). Do not earth (ground).
common

32
 Terminal
Type Terminal Name Description
Symbol
1 changeover contact output indicates that the inverter fault occurs.
Relay

Relay output
A, B, C Fault: discontinuity across B-C (continuity across A-C), Normal: continuity across B-C (discontinuity

Features
(fault output)
across A-C) Contact capacity 230VAC 0.3A (power factor = 0.4) 30VDC 0.3A
Permissible load 24VDC
Control circuit/output signal

Switched Low when the inverter output frequency is equal to or (Maximum 27VDC) 0.1A
RUN Inverter running higher than the starting frequency (initial value 0.5Hz). Switched(a voltage drop is 3.4V
Open collector

Connection
High during stop or DC injection brake operation.

example
maximum when the signal is on)
 Low is when the open
Switched Low when the inverter output frequency is equal to or collector output transistor is
FU Frequency detection higher than the preset detected frequency and High when less than ON (conducts). High is when
the transistor is OFF (does

Specifications
the preset detected frequency.

Standard
not conduct).
Open collector
SE Common terminal of terminal RUN and FU.
output common
Used to output a selected monitored item (such as Output
Pulse

frequency) among several monitored items. (Not output during Permissible load current 1mA

Dimension
FM For meter

Drawings
Outline
inverter reset.)The output signal is proportional to the magnitude of 1440 pulses/s at 60Hz
the corresponding monitoring item.
Communication can be made via Ethernet.
· Category: 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
· Data transmission speed: 100Mbps (100BASE-TX) / 10Mbps (10BASE-T)

Explanation
· Transmission method: Baseband

Diagram
— Ethernet connector · Maximum segment length: 100m between the hub and the inverter
· Number of cascade connection stages: Up to 2 (100BASE-TX) / up to 4 (10BASE-T)
Communication

· Interface: RJ-45

Operation panel

FR Configurator
· Number of interfaces available: 1

Parameter unit
· IP version: IPv4
With the PU connector, RS-485 communication can be established.
— PU connector · Conforming standard: EIA-485 (RS-485) · Transmission format: Multi-drop link
· Communication speed: 4800 to 38400bps · Overall extension: 500m
Use the USB connector to communicate with a personal computer. Setting and monitoring of the

Parameter
inverter is enabled using FR Configurator2.

List
— USB connector
· Interface: conforms to USB1.1 · Transmission Speed: 12Mbps
· Connector: USB mini B connector (receptacle mini B type)

Explanations

Parameters
Note

of
 Set Pr. 267 and a voltage/current input switch correctly, then input an analog signal in accordance with the setting.
Applying a voltage with voltage/current input switch in "I" position (current input is selected) or a current with switch
in "V" position (voltage input is selected) could cause component damage of the inverter or analog circuit of output

Protective
devices.

Functions
 The inverter will be damaged if power is applied to the inverter output terminals (U, V, W). Never perform such wiring.
 indicates that terminal functions can be selected using Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 and Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (I/O terminal function
selection).
 Terminal names and terminal functions are those of the factory set.

Options
 When connecting the DC power supply, be sure to connect the plus side of the power supply to terminal P/+ and
minus side to terminal N/-. Opposite polarity will damage the inverter.
Instructions
Motor
Compatibility
Warranty
Inquiry

33
 (4) Dedicated EtherCAT communication model (-TM)
By installing the EtherCAT communication option (E7NECT_2P manufactured by HMS Industrial Networks AB), EtherCAT
communication is possible.

Terminal
Type Terminal Name Description
Symbol
R/L1,
S/L2, AC power input Connect to the commercial power supply.
T/L3
U, V, W Inverter output Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor.
Main circuit

Brake resistor Connect a brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS type, MYS type) across terminals P/+ and PR.
P/+, PR
connection (The brake resistor cannot be connected to the 0.1K or 0.2K.)
P/+, N/- Brake unit connection Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2).
P/+, P1 DC reactor connection Remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 and connect a DC reactor.

Earth (Ground) For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Must be earthed (grounded).
24V external power supply

Input voltage
Even when the main circuit power supply is OFF,
24V external power 23.5 to 26.5VDC
+24 EtherCAT communication continues with the input from
supply Input current
the 24V external power supply.
0.7A or less

24V external power

SD supply common Common terminal for the terminal +24
terminal

Terminal S1/S2 are safety stop signals for use with in

Safety stop input conjunction with an approved external safety unit. Both
Safety stop function

S1 Input resistance 4.7k

(Channel 1) terminal S1/S2 must be used in dual channel form.
Control circuit

Voltage when contacts are open

Inverter output is shutoff depending on shorting/
21 to 26VDC
opening between S1 and PC, S2 and PC.
Current when contacts are
In the initial status, terminal S1 and S2 are shorted with
Safety stop input short-circuited
S2 terminal PC by shorting wire.
4 to 6mADC
(Channel 2) Remove the shorting wire and connect the safety relay
module when using the safety stop function.
Safety stop input
PC Common terminal for safety stop input terminals S1 and S2.
terminal common
Switched low when the inverter output frequency is
equal to or higher than the starting frequency (initial
value 0.5Hz). Switched high during stop or DC injection Permissible load 24VDC
Open collector

Open collector output brake operation. (maximum 27VDC) 0.1A

Y0 Y0 (Low indicates that the open collector output transistor (a voltage drop is 3.4V
(Inverter running) is ON (conducts). High indicates that the transistor is maximum when the signal is
OFF (does not conduct).) ON)
Use Pr.190 Y0 terminal function selection to change the
function assigned to the terminal.
Open collector output
SE Common terminal of terminal Y0.
common
Use this connector for communication with a personal computer.
 Interface: conforms to USB1.1
USB

— USB connector
 Transmission speed: 12Mbps
 Connector: USB mini B connector (receptacle mini B type)

Note
 The inverter will be damaged if power is applied to the inverter output terminals (U, V, W). Never perform such wiring.
 When connecting the DC power supply, be sure to connect the plus side of the power supply to terminal P/+ and
minus side to terminal N/-. Opposite polarity will damage the inverter.

34
Explanation of the Operation Panel

The operation panel cannot be removed from the inverter.

Operation mode indicator  Operating status indicator

Features
PU: Lit to indicate PU operation mode. Lit or blink during inverter operation. 
EXT: Lit to indicate External operation mode.  Lit: When the forward rotation operation is
(Lit at power-ON at initial setting.) being performed.
NET: Lit to indicate Network operation Slow blinking (1.4s cycle):

Connection
example
mode. When the reverse rotation operation
PU, EXT: Lit to indicate External/PU is being performed.
combined operation mode 1, 2. Fast blinking (0.2s cycle):
These turn OFF when command source is

Specifications
When was pressed or the

Standard
not on operation panel.
start command was given, but the
Unit indicator operation cannot be made.
Hz: Lit to indicate frequency. When the frequency command is less
(Blinks when the set frequency than the starting frequency.

Dimension
Drawings
Outline
monitor is displayed.) When the MRS signal is input.
A: Lit to indicate current.
(Both "Hz" and "A" turn OFF when other Parameter setting mode
than the above is displayed.) Lit to indicate parameter setting mode.

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection

Explanation
Diagram
Monitor (4-digit LED) Monitor indicator
Shows the frequency, parameter number, Lit to indicate monitoring mode.
etc.

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
Stop operation
Setting dial Used to stop Run command.
(Setting dial: Mitsubishi Electric inverter dial) Fault can be reset when protective
Used to change the frequency setting and function is activated (fault).
parameter settings.

Parameter
Press to display the following. Operation mode switchover 

List
 Displays the set frequency in the Used to switch between the PU and
monitor mode External operation mode.
 Present set value is displayed during When using the External operation mode

Explanations

Parameters
calibration (operation using a separately connected

of
 Displays the order in the fault history frequency setting potentiometer and start
mode signal), press this key to light up the EXT
indication.

Protective
Mode switchover

Functions
(Press simultaneously (0.5s) or
Used to change each setting mode.
change Pr. 79 setting to change to
Pressing simultaneously changes combined mode.)
the operation mode. PU: PU operation mode

Options
Pressing for a while (2s) can lock EXT: External operation mode
operation. Cancels PU stop also.

Determination of each setting Start command

Instructions

If pressed during operation, monitor The rotation direction can be selected by

changes as below; setting Pr. 40.

Running frequency
Motor

Output current

Output voltage
Compatibility
Warranty

 The External operation mode cannot be selected for the FL remote communication model, the CC-Link communication model, and the dedicated EtherCAT
communication model. (The EXT LED is OFF.) The NET LED turns ON at power-ON in the initial setting.
 The operation is switched between the PU and NET modes for the FL remote communication model, the CC-Link communication model, and the dedicated
EtherCAT communication model.
Inquiry

35
 Basic operation of the operation panel

Operation mode switchover

At power-ON (External operation mode) 

PU Jog operation mode

(Example)
Monitor/frequency setting

PU operation mode
Value change and frequency appear alternately.
(output frequency monitor)
Frequency setting has been
written and completed.

STOP
Output current monitor Output voltage monitor
Parameter setting

The present
Parameter setting mode setting displayed.

(Example)

Value change Parameter and a setting value

appear alternately.
Parameter write is completed.

Parameter clear All parameter Fault history clear

clear

Initial value
change list

[Operation for displaying fault history]

Fault history

The last eight fault records can be displayed.

(On the display of the last fault record (fault record 1), a decimal point LED is ON.)
When the fault history is empty, is displayed.
While a fault is displayed:
The display shifts as follows by pressing : Output frequency at the fault
Output current Output voltage Energization time.
(After Energization time, it goes back to a fault display.)
Pressing the setting dial shows the fault history number.

 The External operation mode cannot be selected for the FL remote communication model, the CC-Link communication model, and the dedicated EtherCAT
communication model. (The EXT LED is OFF.) The NET LED turns ON at power-ON in the initial setting.

36
Explanations of Parameter unit

Parameter unit (FR-PU07), parameter unit with battery pack (FR-PU07BB(-L))

 The parameter unit is a convenient tool for inverter setting
Key Description

Features
such as direct input method with a numeric keypad,
Use for parameter setting
operation status indication, and help function. Press to choose the parameter setting mode.
 Eight languages can be displayed. First priority monitor is displayed.
 Parameter setting values of maximum of three inverters can In the initial setting, the output frequency is displayed.

Connection
example
be stored. Operation cancel key
 With the FR-PU07BB(-L), parameter check and setting Used to display the function menu.
change can be made without connecting a power supply to A variety of functions can be used on the function menu.
the inverter. For the power supply, use AA nickel metal

Specifications
Used to shift to the next item in the setting or monitoring mode.

Standard
hydride batteries, AA alkaline batteries, or an AC adapter.
 Since the shape is specially designed for portable use, it is to Used to enter a frequency, parameter number or set value.

easy to work with the FR-PU07BB(-L) in hand.

Inverter operates in the External operation mode.
 The parameter unit connection cable FR-CB20 is required for connecting to

Dimension
Drawings
Outline
the inverter. (Parameter unit connection cable FR-CB203(3m) is enclosed 　 Used to select the PU operation mode to display the frequency
with FR-PU07BB(-L).) setting screen.
 To use a parameter unit with battery pack (FR-PU07BB) outside Japan, order  Used to keep on increasing or decreasing the running
a "FR-PU07BB-L" (parameter unit type indicated on the package has L at the frequency. Hold down to vary the frequency.

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
end). Since enclosed batteries may conflict with laws in countries to be used  Press either of these keys on the parameter setting mode

Explanation
Diagram
(new EU Directive on batteries and accumulators, etc.), batteries are not screen to change the parameter setting value sequentially.
 On the selecting screen, these keys are used to move the cursor.
enclosed with an FR-PU07BB-L.
 Hold down and press either of these keys to advance
 The parameter units (FR-PU07 or FR-PU07BB) cannot be used for the FL or return the display screen one page.

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
remote communication model, the CC-Link communication model, and the
dedicated EtherCAT communication model. Forward rotation command key.

POWER lamp Reverse rotation command key.

Lit when the power turns on.

Parameter
 Stop command key.
Monitor

List
 Used to reset the inverter when an alarm occurs.
Liquid crystal display
(16 characters 4 lines with backlight)  Used to write a set value in the setting mode.
Interactive parameter setting  Used as a clear key in the all parameter clear or alarm history
Trouble shooting guidance clear mode.

Explanations

Parameters
Monitor (frequency, current, power, etc.)  Used as a decimal point when entering numerical value.

of
 Used as a parameter number read key in the setting mode.
ALARM lamp  Used as an item select key on the menu screen such as
Lit to indicate an inverter alarm occurrence. parameter list or monitoring list.
 Used as an alarm definition display key in the alarm history

Protective
Functions
display mode.
Operation keys  Used as a command voltage read key in the calibration mode.
(Refer to the table on the right)
FR-PU07 Battery indicator
The color turns orange

Options
when the battery is low.
Green: Normal condition
Orange: Low battery (lasts
50min.) Instructions

FR-PU07BB(-L)
Motor

 Main functions
Function Description
Compatibility

Monitor 6 types of monitors appear by simply pressing .

For PU operation mode and External/PU combined operation mode (Pr.79 = "3"), frequency setting is available.
Frequency setting Settings is performed by the direct setting, which sets frequency directly by to , and the step setting, which
sets frequency continuously by .
Warranty

Reading parameter and changing setting values are easily done. To change the setting value of an parameter, specify
Parameter Setting
the parameter number, or select a parameter from the functional parameter list.
FR-PU07 (PU07BB) reads parameter settings of an inverter, and stores three different parameter settings.
Batch copy FR-PU07 (PU07BB) can also copy the stored parameter setting to another inverter of the same series, or verify its
Inquiry

stored parameter setting against the parameter setting stored in an inverter.

Switching between External operation mode [EXT] and PU operation mode [PU] is easy.
Operation
Start/stop is enabled during PU operation mode and External/PU operation mode (Pr.79 = "3").
 Available function differs by the inverter. Please refer to the instruction manual of the inverter and the parameter unit.

37
 FR Configurator (INVERTER SETUP SOFTWARE)

FR-SW3-SETUP-WE 
(Support for Windows® 10, Windows® 8.1/Pro/Enterprise, Windows® 8, Windows® 7 (32-bit/64-bit), and Windows Vista® SP1 and above (32-bit))

FR Configurator software offers an easy operating environment.

Can be utilized effectively from inverter setting up to maintenance.
Parameter setting, monitoring, etc. can be performed on a display of Windows personal
computer.
A personal computer and an inverter can be easily connected with a USB cable.
(RS-485 communication  using PU connector is also available.)
The inverter on the CC-Link network can be set up via a programmable controller. (FR-
SW3-SETUP-WE CC-Link Seamless)

USB cable USB connector

<How to open the USB connector cover>

 The FL remote communication model, the Ethernet

communication function model, and the dedicated EtherCAT
communication model do not support FR Configurator.
 RS-485RS-232C converter is required.
Pull the cover in the direction of arrow. Then turn it upward.

Startup Monitor area

Desired functions can be In Monitor area, inverter status can be monitored.
performed soon after start-up of (1) Displays monitor data in
the software. waveform
(1) Open the recent used Displays current waveform
System File with High Speed graph
(2) Perform Easy Setup function [Graph] 
(3) Perform each function (2) Monitors the status of I/O
(4) Help terminals. [I/O Terminal
Monitor]
Easy Setup (3) Displays multiple data in
From station number to parameter setting, setting with batch. [Batch Monitor]
wizard style dialog (interactive) is available.
Procedure for Easy Setup System area
(1) System File setting In System area, parameter setting, Diagnosis,
(2) Communication setting Troubleshooting, etc. can be performed.
(3) Inverter recognition (1) Parameter reading,
(4) Control method selection writing, verification,
(5) Motor setting Functional List and
(6) Start command, frequency Individual List display are
command setting available.
(7) Parameter setting [Parameter List]
(2) Displays alarm history
and monitor value at
each alarm occurrence.
Navigation area [Diagnosis]
In Navigation area, switching ONLINE/ (3) Parameter setting conversion from conventional
OFFLINE and changing operation mode can models [Convert] 
be performed.
(1) Frequency setting and forward/reverse Setting wizard
rotation  [Test operation] Setting wizard can set parameters with wizard style dialog
(2) Display the connected inverter in tree (interactive). Inputting or selecting required items for each
view [System List] function, parameter setting can be made, without regard to
(3) Function setting without regard to parameter number.
parameter number [Basic setting]
(4) Estimates the cause of trouble, and suggest Help
counteraction. [Troubleshooting]  Displays operating instructions and details of each
parameters.
 This function is not available with FR-SW3-SETUP-WE CC-Link Seamless.

FR-SW3-SETUP-WE is available for download (free of charge) from the below URL on the internet. FR Configurator SW3 (FR-SW3-SETUP-
WE or FR-SW1-SETUP-WE) needs to be installed to the personal computer prior to updating the software. Also, user registration is required
for the download (free of charge.) (Registration is free of charge.)
Homepage address www.MitsubishiElectric.co.jp/fa
FR-SW3-SETUP-WE (for 700 series) and FR-SW1-SETUP-WE (500 series) can be installed from the FR Configurator SW3.
The FR-E700-NE supports FR Configurator2.

38
Parameter List

For simple variable-speed operation of the inverter, the initial setting of the parameters may be used as they are. Set the
necessary parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Parameter setting, change and check can be made
from the operation panel. For details of parameters, refer to the instruction manual.

Features
REMARKS
  indicates simple mode parameters. (initially set to extended mode)
 The shaded parameters in the table allow its setting to be changed during operation even if "0" (initial value) is set in

Connection
example
Pr. 77Parameter write selection.
(The setting value of Pr. 77 cannot be changed via communication for the FL remote communication model or CC-Link
communication model.)

Specifications
Minimum Refer

Standard
Func- Initial Customer
Parameter Name Setting Range Setting to
tion Value Setting
Increments Page

0 Torque boost 0 to 30% 0.1% 6/4/3/2%  48

Dimension
Drawings
1 Maximum frequency 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 120Hz

Outline
48
2 Minimum frequency 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 0Hz 48
3 Base frequency 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 48
Basic functions

4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 48

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 30Hz 48

Explanation
Diagram
6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 10Hz 48, 66
7 Acceleration time 0 to 3600/360s 0.1/0.01s 5/10/15s  49
8 Deceleration time 0 to 3600/360s 0.1/0.01s 5/10/15s  49

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
Inverter
9 Electronic thermal O/L relay 0 to 500A 0.01A rated 49
current
10 DC injection brake operation frequency 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 3Hz 49

Parameter
DC injection

List
brake

11 DC injection brake operation time 0 to 10s 0.1s 0.5s 49

12 DC injection brake operation voltage 0 to 30% 0.1% 6/4/2%  49

Explanations

Parameters
— 13 Starting frequency 0 to 60Hz 0.01Hz 0.5Hz 49

of
— 14 Load pattern selection 0 to 3 1 0 50
operation

15 Jog frequency 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 5Hz 50

JOG

Protective
Functions
16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 3600/360s 0.1/0.01s 0.5s 50

— 17 MRS input selection 0, 2, 4 1 0 50

— 18 High speed maximum frequency 120 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 120Hz 48
— 19 Base frequency voltage 0 to 1000V, 8888, 9999 0.1V 9999 48

Options
deceleration time

Acceleration/deceleration reference
Acceleration/

20 1 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 49

frequency Instructions

Acceleration/deceleration time
21 0, 1 1 0 49
increments
prevention

22 Stall prevention operation level 0 to 200% 0.1% 150% 51

Stall

Motor

Stall prevention operation level

23 0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 51
compensation factor at double speed
24 Multi-speed setting (speed 4) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 48
Multi-speed

Compatibility

25 Multi-speed setting (speed 5) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 48

setting

26 Multi-speed setting (speed 6) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 48

27 Multi-speed setting (speed 7) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 48
— 29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 51
Warranty

— 30 Regenerative function selection 0, 1, 2  1 0 51, 54

31 Frequency jump 1A 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 52
Frequency jump

32 Frequency jump 1B 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 52

33 Frequency jump 2A 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 52
Inquiry

34 Frequency jump 2B 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 52

35 Frequency jump 3A 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 52
36 Frequency jump 3B 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 52
— 37  Speed display 0, 0.01 to 9998 0.001 0 52

39
 Minimum Refer
Func- Initial Customer
Parameter Name Setting Range Setting to
tion Value Setting
Increments Page
— 40 RUN key rotation direction selection 0, 1 1 0 52
41 Up-to-frequency sensitivity 0 to 100% 0.1% 10% 52
Frequency
detection

42 Output frequency detection 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 6Hz 52

Output frequency detection for reverse
43 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 52
rotation
44 Second acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 3600/360s 0.1/0.01s 5/10/15s  49
Second functions

45 Second deceleration time 0 to 3600/360s, 9999 0.1/0.01s 9999 49

46 Second torque boost 0 to 30%, 9999 0.1% 9999 48
47 Second V/F (base frequency) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 48
48 Second stall prevention operation current 0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 51, 66
51 Second electronic thermal O/L relay 0 to 500A, 9999 0.01A 9999 49
0, 5, 7 to 12, 14, 20,
52 DU/PU main display data selection 23 to 25, 52 to 56 , 1 0 53
57 , 61, 62, 100
Monitor functions

1 to 3, 5, 7 to 12, 14, 21,

54  FM terminal function selection 1 1 53
24, 52, 53, 61, 62
55  Frequency monitoring reference 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 53
Inverter
56  Current monitoring reference 0 to 500A 0.01A rated 53
current
Automatic

functions

57 Restart coasting time 0, 0.1 to 5s, 9999 0.1s 9999 54

restart

58 Restart cushion time 0 to 60s 0.1s 1s 54

— 59 Remote function selection 0, 1, 2, 3 1 0 55

— 60 Energy saving control selection 0, 9 1 0 55
61 Reference current 0 to 500A, 9999 0.01A 9999 55
acceleration/
deceleration
Automatic

62 Reference value at acceleration 0 to 200%, 9999 1% 9999 55

63 Reference value at deceleration 0 to 200%, 9999 1% 9999 55

— 65 Retry selection 0 to 5 1 0 56
Stall prevention operation reduction
— 66 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 51
starting frequency
67 Number of retries at fault occurrence 0 to 10, 101 to 110 1 0 56
Retry

68 Retry waiting time 0.1 to 360s 0.1s 1s 56

69 Retry count display erase 0 1 0 56
— 70 Special regenerative brake duty 0 to 30% 0.1% 0% 51
0, 1, 3 to 6, 13 to 16, 23,
— 71 Applied motor 1 0 56
24, 40, 43, 44, 50, 53, 54
— 72 PWM frequency selection 0 to 15 1 1 57
— 73  Analog input selection 0, 1, 10, 11 1 1 57
— 74  Input filter time constant 0 to 8 1 1 57
Reset selection/disconnected PU
— 75 0 to 3, 14 to 17 1 14 57
detection/PU stop selection
— 77  Parameter write selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 57
— 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 57
—  79  Operation mode selection 0, 1, 2, 3 , 4 , 6, 7  1 0 58

40
 Minimum Refer
Func- Initial Customer
Parameter Name Setting Range Setting to
tion Value Setting
Increments Page

Features
80 Motor capacity 0.1 to 15kW, 9999 0.01kW 9999 59
81 Number of motor poles 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 9999 1 9999 59
82 Motor excitation current 0 to 500A (0 to ****), 9999  0.01A (1) 9999 59

Connection
200V/400V

example
83 Rated motor voltage 0 to 1000V 0.1V 59

84 Rated motor frequency 10 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 59
Speed control gain (Advanced

Specifications
89 0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 59
magnetic flux vector)

Standard
Motor constants

0 to 50 (0 to ****) ,
90 Motor constant (R1) 0.001 (1)  9999 59
9999 
0 to 50 (0 to ****) ,
91 Motor constant (R2) 0.001 (1)  9999 59

Dimension
Drawings
9999 

Outline
0 to 1000mH (0 to 50, 0.1mH
92 Motor constant (L1)/d-shaft inductance 9999 59
0 to ****), 9999  (0.001, 1) 

0 to 1000mH (0 to 50, 0.1mH

Terminal Specification
93 Motor constant (L2)/q-shaft inductance 9999 59

Terminal Connection
0 to ****) , 9999  (0.001, 1) 

Explanation
Diagram
0 to 100% (0 to 500, 0 0.1%
94 Motor constant (X) 9999 59
to ****) , 9999  (0.01, 1) 
96 Auto tuning setting/status 0, 1, 11, 21 1 0 59

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
117  PU communication station number 0 to 31 (0 to 247) 1 0 60
118  PU communication speed 48, 96, 192, 384 1 192 60
communication
PU connector

119  PU communication stop bit length 0, 1, 10, 11 1 1 60

120  PU communication parity check 0, 1, 2 1 2 60

Parameter
121  Number of PU communication retries 0 to 10, 9999 1 1 60

List
122  PU communication check time interval 0, 0.1 to 999.8s, 9999 0.1s 0 60
123  PU communication waiting time setting 0 to 150ms, 9999 1ms 9999 60
124  PU communication CR/LF selection 0, 1, 2 1 1 60

Explanations

Parameters
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain

of
—  125  frequency/frequency setting gain 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 61
frequency 
126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
— 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 61

Protective
Functions
 frequency
PID control automatic switchover
127  0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 61
frequency
0, 20, 21, 40 to 43,
128  PID action selection 1 0 61
PID operation

50, 51, 60, 61

Options
129  PID proportional band 0.1 to 1000%, 9999 0.1% 100% 61
130  PID integral time 0.1 to 3600s, 9999 0.1s 1s 61
131  PID upper limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 61
Instructions

132  PID lower limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 61

133  PID action set point 0 to 100%, 9999 0.01% 9999 61
134  PID differential time 0.01 to 10.00s, 9999 0.01s 9999 61
PU

145  PU display language selection 0 to 7 1 0 61

Motor

— 146  Built-in potentiometer switching 0, 1 1 1 61

Acceleration/deceleration time
— 147 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 49
switching frequency
Compatibility

150 Output current detection level 0 to 200% 0.1% 150% 62

detection
Current

151 Output current detection signal delay time 0 to 10s 0.1s 0s 62

152 Zero current detection level 0 to 200% 0.1% 5% 62
153 Zero current detection time 0 to 1s 0.01s 0.5s 62
Voltage reduction selection during stall
Warranty

— 154 1, 11 1 1 51
prevention operation
— 156 Stall prevention operation selection 0 to 31, 100, 101 1 0 51
— 157 OL signal output timer 0 to 25s, 9999 0.1s 0s 51
—  160 User group read selection 0, 1, 9999 1 0 62
Inquiry

Frequency setting/key lock operation

— 161 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 62
selection

41
 Minimum Refer
Func- Initial Customer
Parameter Name Setting Range Setting to
tion Value Setting
Increments Page
Automatic restart after instantaneous
Automatic

162 0, 1, 10, 11 1 1 54
functions
restart

power failure selection

Stall prevention operation level for
165 0 to 200% 0.1% 150% 54
restart
— 168
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
— 169
monitor clear
Cumulative

170 Watt-hour meter clear 0, 10, 9999 1 9999 53

171 Operation hour meter clear 0, 9999 1 9999 53

172  User group registered display/batch clear 9999, (0 to 16) 1 0 62

group
User

173 User group registration 0 to 999, 9999 1 9999 62

174 User group clear 0 to 999, 9999 1 9999 62
0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12,
178  STF terminal function selection 14 to 16, 18, 24, 25, 1 60 63
60, 62, 65 to 67, 9999
Input terminal function assignment

0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12,
179  STR terminal function selection 14 to 16, 18, 24, 25, 1 61 63
61, 62, 65 to 67, 9999
RL terminal function selection/RY4
180  1 0 63
function selection 
RM terminal function selection/RY3
181  1 1 63
function selection 
RH terminal function selection/RY2 0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12,
182  14 to 16, 18, 24, 25, 1 2 63
function selection  62, 65 to 67, 9999
MRS terminal function selection/RY9
183  1 24 63
function selection 
RES terminal function selection/RYB
184  1 62 63
function selection 
0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16,
RUN terminal function selection/RX2 20, 25, 26, 46, 47, 64,
190  68 ,80 , 81  90, 91, 1 0 63
(terminal Y0) function selection 
93, 95, 96, 98, 99, 100,
Output terminal function assignment

101, 103, 104, 107, 108,

111 to 116, 120, 125,
FU terminal function selection/RX6 126, 146, 147, 164, 168
191  , 180 181 190, 1 4 63
function selection  191, 193, 195, 196, 198,
199, 9999
0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16,
20, 25, 26, 46, 47, 64,
68 , 80 , 81  90, 91,
95, 96, 98, 99, 100, 101,
A,B,C terminal function selection/RX7 103, 104, 107, 108,
192  1 99 63
function selection  111 to 116, 120, 125,
126, 146, 147, 164, 168
 180 181  190,
191, 195, 196, 198, 199,
9999
232  Multi-speed setting (speed 8) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 48
233  Multi-speed setting (speed 9) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 48
Multi-speed setting

234  Multi-speed setting (speed 10) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 48
235  Multi-speed setting (speed 11) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 48
236  Multi-speed setting (speed 12) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 48
237  Multi-speed setting (speed 13) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 48
238  Multi-speed setting (speed 14) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 48
239  Multi-speed setting (speed 15) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 48
— 240 Soft-PWM operation selection 0, 1 1 1 57
— 241  Analog input display unit switchover 0, 1 1 0 61
— 244 Cooling fan operation selection 0, 1 1 1 64

42
 Minimum Refer
Func- Initial Customer
Parameter Name Setting Range Setting to
tion Value Setting
Increments Page

Features
245 Rated slip 0 to 50%, 9999 0.01% 9999 64
compensation

246 Slip compensation time constant 0.01 to 10s 0.01s 0.5s 64

Slip

Constant-power range slip

Connection
247 0, 9999 1 9999 64

example
compensation selection

— 249 Earth (ground) fault detection at start 0, 1 1 0 64

0 to 100s,

Specifications
Standard
— 250 Stop selection 1000 to 1100s , 0.1s 9999 64
8888 , 9999
— 251 Output phase loss protection selection 0, 1 1 1 64
255 Life alarm status display (0 to 15) 1 0 65
Life diagnosis

Dimension
Drawings
256 Inrush current limit circuit life display (0 to 100%) 1% 100% 65

Outline
257 Control circuit capacitor life display (0 to 100%) 1% 100% 65
258 Main circuit capacitor life display (0 to 100%) 1% 100% 65
259 Main circuit capacitor life measuring 0, 1 (2, 3, 8, 9) 1 0 65

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection

Explanation
Power
failure

Diagram
stop

261 Power failure stop selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 65

— 267  Terminal 4 input selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 57

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
— 268 Monitor decimal digits selection 0, 1, 9999 1 9999 53
— 269 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
— 270 Stop-on contact control selection 0, 1 1 0 66
Stop-on contact excitation current low-
275 0 to 300%, 9999 0.1% 9999 66

Parameter
Stop-on

speed multiplying factor

contact
control

List
PWM carrier frequency at stop-on
276 0 to 9, 9999 1 9999 66
contact

Explanations

Parameters
Stall prevention operation current
— 277 0, 1 1 0 51
switchover

of
278  Brake opening frequency 0 to 30Hz 0.01Hz 3Hz 66
Brake sequence

279  Brake opening current 0 to 200% 0.1% 130% 66

function

280  Brake opening current detection time 0 to 2s 0.1s 0.3s 66

Protective
Functions
281  Brake operation time at start 0 to 5s 0.1s 0.3s 66
282  Brake operation frequency 0 to 30Hz 0.01Hz 6Hz 66
283  Brake operation time at stop 0 to 5s 0.1s 0.3s 66
286 Droop gain 0 to 100% 0.1% 0% 67
control

Options
Droop

287 Droop filter time constant 0 to 1s 0.01s 0.3s 67

— 292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration 0, 1, 7, 8, 11 1 0 55, 66
Acceleration/deceleration separate
Instructions

— 293 0 to 2 1 0 55
selection
— 295 Magnitude of frequency change setting 0, 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10 0.01 0 62
0 to 6, 99, 100 to 106,
Password

296 Password lock level 1 9999 67

function

199, 9999
Motor

(0 to 5), 1000 to 9998,

297 Password lock/unlock 1 9999 67
9999
— 298 Frequency search gain 0 to 32767, 9999 1 9999 59
Compatibility

Rotation direction detection selection

— 299 0, 1, 9999 1 0 54
at restarting
0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16,
 313  RX9 function selection 20, 25, 26, 46, 47, 64, 1 9999 —
Output terminal function

68 , 80 , 81 , 90,

Warranty

91, 93, 95, 96, 98, 99,

assignment

100, 101, 103, 104, 107,

 314  RXA function selection 1 9999 —
108, 111 to 116, 120,
125, 126, 146, 147, 164,
Inquiry

168 , 180 , 181 ,

 315  RXB function selection 190, 191, 193, 195, 196, 1 9999 —
198, 199, 9999

43
 Minimum Refer
Func- Initial Customer
Parameter Name Setting Range Setting to
tion Value Setting
Increments Page
Communication operation command
338  0, 1 1 0 68
communication

source
RS-485

339  Communication speed command source 0, 1, 2 1 0 68

340  Communication startup mode selection 0, 1, 10 1 0 58
342  Communication EEPROM write selection 0, 1 1 0 60
343  Communication error count — 1 0 60

—  349  Communication reset selection 0, 1 1 0 —

 442  Default gateway address 1 0 to 255 1 0 —

communication
Ethernet

 443  Default gateway address 2 0 to 255 1 0 —

 444  Default gateway address 3 0 to 255 1 0 —
 445  Default gateway address 4 0 to 255 1 0 —
constant
Second
motor

450 Second applied motor 0, 1, 9999 1 9999 56

495  Remote output selection 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 68

Output

496  Remote output data 1 0 to 4095 1 0 68

497  Remote output data 2 0 to 4095 1 0 68
Communication error execution waiting
Communication error

 500  0 to 999.8s 0.1s 0s —

time

Communication error occurrence count

() 501  0 1 0 —
display

Stop mode selection at communication

502  0, 1, 2, 3 1 0 60
error
Maintenance

503 Maintenance timer 0 (1 to 9998) 1 0 68

504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time 0 to 9998, 9999 1 9999 68

Frequency command sign selection

 541  0, 1 1 0 —
(CC-Link)
CC-Link

Communication station number (CC-

 542  1 to 64 1 1 —
Link)
 543  Baud rate selection (CC-Link) 0 to 4 1 0 —
 544  CC-Link extended setting 0, 1, 12, 14, 18 1 0 —
547  USB communication station number 0 to 31 1 0 69
USB

548  USB communication check time interval 0 to 999.8s, 9999 0.1s 9999 69
549  Protocol selection 0, 1 1 0 60
Communication

NET mode operation command source

550  0, 2, 9999 1 9999 68
selection
PU mode operation command source
551  2 , 3, 4, 9999 1 9999 68
selection
555  Current average time 0.1 to 1.0s 0.1s 1s 69
Current average
time monitor

556  Data output mask time 0 to 20s 0.1s 0s 69

Inverter
Current average value monitor signal
557  0 to 500A 0.01A rated 69
output reference current
current

— 563 Energization time carrying-over times (0 to 65535) 1 0 53

— 564 Operating time carrying-over times (0 to 65535) 1 0 53
— 571 Holding time at a start 0 to 10s, 9999 0.1s 9999 49
— 611 Acceleration time at a restart 0 to 3600s, 9999 0.1s 9999 54

44
 Minimum Refer
Func- Initial Customer
Parameter Name Setting Range Setting to
tion Value Setting
Increments Page

Features
communication


EtherCAT

629 to 635,
Option information1 to 10 — — — —

Connection
637 to 639

example


— 653 Speed smoothing control 0 to 200% 0.1% 0% 69

— 665 Regeneration avoidance frequency gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 69

Specifications
Standard

communication
EtherCAT

690 to 697,
738 to 746, Option parameter1 to 33 0 to 65535 1 0 —
753 to 768

Dimension
Drawings
Outline


— 800 Control method selection 20, 30 1 20 59

 805  Ethernet IP address 1 0 to 255 1 192 —

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
 806  Ethernet IP address 2 0 to 255 1 168 —

Explanation
Diagram
 807  Ethernet IP address 3 0 to 255 1 50 —
 808  Ethernet IP address 4 0 to 255 1 1 —
 809  Subnet mask 1 0 to 255 1 255 —

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
 810  Subnet mask 2 0 to 255 1 255 —
 811  Subnet mask 3 0 to 255 1 255 —
 812  Subnet mask 4 0 to 255 1 0 —
Ethernet communication network
 830  1 to 239 1 1 —

Parameter
number

List
Ethernet communication station
 831  1 to 120 1 1 —
number
 832  Link speed and duplex mode selection 0 to 4 1 0 —

Explanations

Parameters
 833  Ethernet function selection 1 1 31 —
0, 10, 20, 30, 31, 36, 38,
 834  Ethernet function selection 2 1 20 —

of
9999
 835  Ethernet function selection 3 1 9999 —
 837  Ethernet IP filter address 1 0 to 255 1 0 —

Protective
 838  Ethernet IP filter address 2 0 to 255 1 0 —

Functions
 839  Ethernet IP filter address 3 0 to 255 1 0 —
Ethernet communication

 840  Ethernet IP filter address 4 0 to 255 1 0 —

Ethernet IP filter address 2 range
 841  0 to 255, 9999 1 9999 —
specification

Options
Ethernet IP filter address 3 range
 842  0 to 255, 9999 1 9999 —
specification
Ethernet IP filter address 4 range
 843  0 to 255, 9999 1 9999 —
Instructions

specification
Ethernet command source selection IP
 844  0 to 255 1 0 —
address 1
Ethernet command source selection IP
 845  0 to 255 1 0 —
address 2
Motor

Ethernet command source selection IP

 846  0 to 255 1 0 —
address 3
Ethernet command source selection IP
 847  0 to 255 1 0 —
Compatibility

address 4
Ethernet command source selection IP
 848  0 to 255, 9999 1 9999 —
address 3 range specification
Ethernet command source selection IP
 849  0 to 255, 9999 1 9999 —
Warranty

address 4 range specification

Ethernet TCP disconnection time
 850  1 to 7200 1 3600 —
coefficient
Ethernet signal loss detection function
 851  0, 2, 3 1 3 —
Inquiry

selection
Ethernet communication check time
 852  0 to 999.8s, 9999 0.1s 1.5s —
interval
0 to 500A (0 to ****) ,
— 859 Torque current 0.01A (1)  9999 59
9999 

45
 Minimum Refer
Func- Initial Customer
Parameter Name Setting Range Setting to
tion Value Setting
Increments Page
Protective
functions

872  Input phase loss protection selection 0, 1 1 1 64

Regeneration avoidance operation

882 0, 1, 2 1 0 69
selection
Regeneration
avoidance

Regeneration avoidance operation 400VDC/

function

883 300 to 800V 0.1V 69

level 780VDC 
Regeneration avoidance compensation
885 0 to 10Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 6Hz 69
frequency limit value
886 Regeneration avoidance voltage gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 69
parameter

888 Free parameter 1 0 to 9999 1 9999 69

Free

889 Free parameter 2 0 to 9999 1 9999 69

C0 (900)
FM terminal calibration — — — 70

Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
C2 (902)
frequency/frequency setting bias 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 0Hz 61

frequency 
C3 (902)
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 0 to 300% 0.1% 0% 61

Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
Calibration parameters

125 (903)
frequency/frequency setting gain 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 61

frequency 
C4 (903)
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 61


C5 (904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias

0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 0Hz 61
 frequency
C6 (904)
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 0 to 300% 0.1% 20% 61


126 (905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain

0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 61
 frequency
C7 (905)
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 61


C22 (922) Frequency setting voltage bias

0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 0Hz 61
Calibration parameters

 frequency (built-in potentiometer)

C23 (922) Frequency setting voltage bias (built-in
0 to 300% 0.1% 0% 61
 potentiometer)
C24 (923) Frequency setting voltage gain
0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 61
 frequency (built-in potentiometer)
C25 (923) Frequency setting voltage gain (built-in
0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 61
 potentiometer)
990  PU buzzer control 0, 1 1 1 70
PU

991  PU contrast adjustment 0 to 63 1 58 70

46
 Minimum Refer
Func- Initial Customer
Parameter Name Setting Range Setting to
tion Value Setting
Increments Page

Features
Initial value change list

 Pr.CL Parameter clear 0, 1 1 0 70

Clear parameters

 ALLC All parameter clear 0, 1 1 0 70

Connection
example
 Er.CL Fault history clear 0, 1 1 0 70

 Pr.CH Initial value change list — — — 70

Specifications
Standard
 Differ according to capacities.
6%: 0.75K(SC) or lower
4%: 1.5K(SC) to 3.7K(SC)
3%: 5.5K(SC), 7.5K(SC)

Dimension
Drawings
2%: 11K(SC), 15K(SC)

Outline
 Differ according to capacities.
5s: 3.7K(SC) or lower
10s: 5.5K(SC), 7.5K(SC)

Terminal Specification
15s: 11K(SC), 15K(SC)

Terminal Connection

Explanation
 Differ according to capacities.

Diagram
6%: 0.1K(SC), 0.2K(SC)
4%: 0.4K(SC) to 7.5K(SC)
2%: 11K(SC), 15K(SC)

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
 The initial value differs according to the voltage class. (100V, 200V class/400V class)
 The range differs according to the Pr. 71 setting.
 The setting is available for the safety stop function model, the CC-Link communication model, and the dedicated EtherCAT communication model.
 The setting is available for the safety stop function model (when equipped with the FR-E7DS), the CC-Link communication model, and the dedicated
EtherCAT communication model.

Parameter
 Set this parameter when calibrating the operation panel built-in potentiometer for the FR-E500 series operation panel (PA02) connected with cable.

List
 The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the operation panel (PA02) for the FR-E500 series or parameter unit (FR-PU07).
 Available only for the three-phase power input model.
 The settings of this parameter cannot be changed via communication on the FL remote communication model, the CC-Link communication model, and

Explanations

Parameters
the dedicated EtherCAT communication model.

of
 The settings of this parameter cannot be changed via communication on the dedicated EtherCAT communication model.
 This parameter in the FL remote communication model and the dedicated EtherCAT communication model is for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
 This parameter in the FL remote communication model is for manufacturer setting. Do not set.

Protective
Functions
 This parameter in the CC-Link communication model is for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
 The parameter can be set only for the CC-Link communication model. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the CC-Link communication model
inverter.
 This parameter in the CC-Link communication model and Ethernet communication function model can be set. For the details, refer to the Instruction
Manual of the relevant model.

Options
 The name differs depending on the model (standard control circuit terminal model, safety stop function model, CC-Link communication model, EtherCAT
communication model). For the details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the relevant model.
 This setting is available for the FL remote communication model, the CC-Link communication model, and the dedicated EtherCAT communication model
(other than the FL remote communication model this is a simple mode parameter). For the details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the relevant model.
Instructions

 This setting is not available for the Ethernet communication function model.
 Setting of the dedicated EtherCAT communication model is possible with the EtherCAT communication option (E7NECT_2P manufactured by HMS
Industrial Networks AB) installed. For the details, refer to the dedicated EtherCAT communication model or the EtherCAT communication option
Instruction Manual.
 This parameter in the dedicated EtherCAT communication model is for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
Motor

 This parameter is only available for the Ethernet communication function model. For details, refer to the Ethernet communication function model
Instruction Manual.
Compatibility
Warranty
Inquiry

47
 Explanations of Parameters

The abbreviations in the explanations below indicate V/F ...V/F control, AD MFVC ...advanced magnetic flux vector control,
GP MFVC ...general-purpose magnetic flux vector control. (Parameters without any indication are valid for all control)

Pr. 0, 46 Pr. 3, 19, 47

Manual torque boost V/F Base frequency, voltage V/F

Pr. 0 Torque boost Pr. 46 Second torque boost Pr. 3 Base frequency Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage
Pr. 47 Second V/F (base frequency)
You can compensate for a voltage drop in the low-frequency
region to improve motor torque reduction in the low-speed region.  Used to adjust the inverter outputs (voltage, frequency) to the motor
 Motor torque in the low-frequency range can be adjusted to the load rating.
to increase the starting motor torque.  When running the standard motor, generally set the rated frequency
 Two kinds of starting torque boost can be switched by using RT of the motor in Pr. 3 Base frequency. When running the motor using
signal. electronic bypass operation, set Pr. 3 to the same value as the power
 This function is valid for V/F control only. supply frequency.
 When you want to change the base frequency when switching two
When Using
100%
the Mitsubishi types of motors with one inverter, use the Pr. 47 Second V/F (base
Output voltage

Pr. 0 Initial Value Electric

Constant frequency).
Torque Motor  Use Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage to set the base voltage (e.g. rated
0.1K to motor voltage).
Pr. 0 Setting range 6% 
Pr. 46 0.75K
 This function is valid for V/F control only.
0 Base frequency 1.5K to 3.7K 4% 

Output voltage (V)

Output frequency (Hz)
5.5K, 7.5K 3% 2%
11K, 15K 2% 
 If the Pr. 71 initial value is Pr. 19
Output frequency
changed to the setting for use (Hz)
with a constant-torque motor, Pr. 3
the Pr. 0 setting changes to the Pr. 47
corresponding value in the
above table.
Pr. 4 to 6, 24 to 27, 232 to 239
Pr. 1, 2, 18 Multi-speed setting operation
Pr. 4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) Pr. 5Multi-speed setting (middle speed)
Maximum/minimum frequency Pr. 6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) Pr. 24 Multi-speed setting (speed 4)
Pr. 1 Maximum frequency Pr. 2 Minimum frequency Pr. 25 Multi-speed setting (speed 5) Pr. 26 Multi-speed setting (speed 6)
Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency Pr. 27 Multi-speed setting (speed 7) Pr. 232 Multi-speed setting (speed 8)
Pr. 233 Multi-speed setting (speed 9) Pr. 234 Multi-speed setting (speed 10)
Motor speed can be limited.
Pr. 235 Multi-speed setting (speed 11) Pr. 236 Multi-speed setting (speed 12)
 Clamp the upper and lower limits of the output frequency. Pr. 237 Multi-speed setting (speed 13) Pr. 238 Multi-speed setting (speed 14)
 To perform operation above 120Hz, set the maximum output Pr. 239 Multi-speed setting (speed 15)
frequency in Pr. 18. Can be used to change the preset speed in the parameter with the
(When Pr. 18 is set, Pr. 1 is automatically changed to the frequency contact signals.
set in Pr. 18. Also, when Pr. 1 is set, Pr. 18 is automatically changed Any speed can be selected by merely turning on-off the contact
to the frequency set in Pr. 1.)
signals (RH, RM, RL, REX signals).
Clamped at the  Operation is performed at the frequency set in Pr. 4 when the RH
maximum frequency
Output frequency
(Hz)
signal turns on, Pr. 5 when the RM signal turns on, and Pr. 6 when
the RL signal turns on.
Pr. 1  Frequency from 4 speed to 15 speed can be set according to the
Pr. 18
combination of the RH, RM, RL and REX signals. Set the running
Pr. 2 Frequency setting
frequencies in Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 (In the initial value
0 5, 10V
Clamped at the
(4mA) (20mA) setting, speed 4 to speed 15 are unavailable)
minimum frequency
Output frequency (Hz)

Speed 10
Speed 1 Speed 5
(High speed) Speed 11
Speed 6 Speed 12
Speed 2 Speed 9
(Middle speed) Speed 13
Speed 4 Speed 8
Speed 3 Speed 14
(Low speed)
Speed 7 Speed 15

Time
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
RH

RM ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
RL

REX ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

∗1

 When "9999" is set in Pr. 232 Multi-speed setting (speed 8), operation is
performed at frequency set in Pr. 6 when RH, RM and RL are turned OFF
and REX is turned ON.

48 When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.
 Pr. 7, 8, 20, 21, 44, 45, 147 Pr. 10 to 12
Acceleration/deceleration time setting DC injection brake

Features
Pr. 7 Acceleration time Pr. 8 Deceleration time Pr. 10 DC injection brake operation frequency Pr. 11 DC injection brake operation time
Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments Pr. 12 DC injection brake operation voltage
Pr. 44 Second acceleration/deceleration time Pr. 45 Second deceleration time
The DC injection brake can be operated at a motor stop to adjust
Pr. 147 Acceleration/deceleration time switching frequency
the stop timing and braking torque.

Connection
example
Used to set motor acceleration/deceleration time.
When 0 is set in Pr. 11 or Pr. 12, DC injection brake is not
Set a larger value for a slower speed increase/decrease or a
performed.
smaller value for a faster speed increase/decrease.

Specifications
 Use Pr. 7 Acceleration time to set the acceleration time to reach Pr. 20 When Using the

Output frequency (Hz)

Standard
Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency from 0Hz Pr. 12 Initial Mitsubishi
Value Electric Constant
 Use Pr. 8 Deceleration time to set the deceleration time taken to Torque Motor
Pr. 10
reach 0Hz from Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency. Operation frequency 0.1K, 0.2K 6% 
 When RT signal is off, automatic switching of the acceleration/ Time 0.4K to 3.7K 4% 

Dimension
Pr. 12

Drawings
deceleration time is available with Pr. 147. DC injection 5.5K, 7.5K 4% 2%

Outline
Operation
brake voltage voltage
Time
11K, 15K 2% 
Pr. 11 Operation time
Pr. 20 Pr. 21  If the Pr. 71 initial value is
(60Hz) Running Description changed to the setting for use
frequency Setting

Terminal Specification
with a constant-torque motor, the

Terminal Connection
frequency (Hz)

0 Increments: Increments Pr. 12 setting changes to the

Explanation
Diagram
0.1s and setting corresponding value in the above
Output

(initial
Time Range: range of table.
value) 0 to 3600s
Acceleration time Deceleration time acceleration/
Pr. 7, Pr. 44 Pr. 8, Pr. 45 Increments: deceleration

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
0.01s time setting
1 Range: 0 to
360s
can be
changed. Pr. 13, 571
Output frequency
Starting frequency
(Hz) Pr. 13 Starting frequency Pr. 571 Holding time at a start

Parameter
Set

List
frequency You can set the starting frequency and hold the set starting
Pr. 147 frequency for a certain period of time.
setting
Time Set these functions when you need the staring torque or want

Explanations
Slope set Slope set Slope set Slope set

Parameters
by Pr. 7 by Pr. 44 by Pr. 44 by Pr. 8 smooth motor drive at a start.
(Pr. 45)

of
Output
Acceleration time Deceleration time
frequency (Hz)

60

Pr. 9, 51

Protective
Setting

Functions
range

Motor protection from overheat Pr. 13

0

(electronic thermal relay function)

Time
Pr. 571 setting time
STF ON
Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay Pr. 51 Second electronic thermal O/L relay

Options
Set the current of the electronic thermal relay function to protect
the motor from overheat. This feature provides the optimum
protective characteristics, including reduced motor cooling
Instructions

capability, at low speed.

 This function detects the overload (overheat) of the motor, stops the
operation of the inverter's output transistor, and stops the output.
 Set the rated current [A] of the motor in Pr. 9.
(If the motor has both 50Hz and 60Hz rating and the Pr. 3 Base
Motor

frequency is set to 60Hz, set the 1.1 times of the 60Hz rated motor
current.)
 Set "0" in Pr. 9 to make the electronic thermal relay function invalid
when using a motor with an external thermal relay, etc. (Note that
Compatibility

the output transistor protection of the inverter functions (E.THT).)

 When using a Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor
1) Set any of "1, 13 to 16, 50, 53, 54" in Pr. 71. (This provides a
100% continuous torque characteristic in the low-speed range.)
Warranty

2) Set the rated current of the motor in Pr. 9.

 When the RT signal is on, thermal protection is provided based on
the Pr. 51 setting.
Use this function when running two motors of different rated currents
individually by a single inverter. (When running two motors together,
Inquiry

use external thermal relays.)

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions. 49
 Pr. 14 Pr. 15, 16
V/F pattern matching applications Jog operation
V/F Pr. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time

Pr. 14 Load pattern selection You can set the frequency and acceleration/deceleration time for
jog operation. Jog operation can be performed from either of the
You can select the optimum output characteristic (V/F
external or the PU operation mode.
characteristic) for the application and load characteristics.
Can be used for conveyor positioning, test operation, etc.
This function is valid for V/F control only.
Output frequency (Hz)
 Constant-torque load application
Pr. 14 = 0
(setting "0", initial value) Pr. 20

100%  At or less than the base frequency, the Pr. 15 Jog frequency Forward
setting range rotation
output voltage varies linearly with the
Output voltage

Reverse
Time
rotation
output frequency. Pr. 16
 Set this value when driving the load
whose load torque is constant even if JOG signal ON
Pr. 3 Base frequency
Output frequency (Hz)
the speed varies, e.g. conveyor, cart
or roll drive. Forward rotation STF ON
 Variable-torque load application
Pr. 14 = 1 Reverse rotation STR ON
(setting "1")
100%  At or less than the base frequency, the
Pr. 17
Output voltage

output voltage varies with the output

frequency in a square curve. Logic selection of output stop signal (MRS)
 Set this value when driving the load Pr. 17 MRS input selection
whose load torque varies in proportion
Pr. 3 Base frequency The inverter output can be shut off by the MRS signal. Also, logic
to the square of the speed, e.g. fan or
Output frequency (Hz)
for the MRS signal can be selected.
pump.
When Pr. 17 is set to "4", the MRS signal from external terminal
 Constant-torque load application (setting "2, 3")
(output stop) can be changed to the normally closed (NC contact)
 Set "2" when a vertical lift load is fixed as power driving load at
input, and the MRS signal from communication can be changed to
forward rotation and regenerative load at reverse rotation.
the normally open (NO contact) input.
 Pr. 0 Torque boost is valid during forward rotation and torque boost
is automatically changed to "0%" during reverse rotation. Pr. 46 Setting value "0" (initial value) Setting value "2"
Inverter Inverter
Second torque boost is valid when the RT signal turns ON. The motor coasts to stop

 Set "3" for an elevated load that is in the driving mode during MRS MRS
reverse rotation and in the regenerative load mode during forward SD SD

rotation according to the load weight, e.g. counterweight system.

 To assign the RT signal to a terminal, set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Time

184 (input terminal function selection).

MRS signal ON

Pr. 14 = 2 Pr. 14 = 3 STF (STR) ON

For vertical lift loads For vertical lift loads signal
At forward rotation boost...Pr. 0 (Pr. 46) At forward rotation boost...0%
setting At reverse rotation boost...Pr. 0 (Pr. 46)
At reverse rotation boost...0% setting Pr. 18 Refer to the section about Pr. 1.
100% 100%
Pr. 19
Output voltage

Output voltage

Forward Reverse
Refer to the section about Pr. 3.
rotation rotation

Reverse Forward
Pr. 20, 21 Refer to the section about Pr. 7.
Pr. 0 rotation Pr. 0 rotation
Pr. 46 Pr. 46
Base frequency Base frequency
Output frequency (Hz) Output frequency (Hz)

50 When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.
 Pr. 22, 23, 48, 66, 154, 156, 157, 277 Pr. 29
Stall prevention operation Acceleration/deceleration pattern

Features
Pr. 23 Stall prevention operation level Pr. 29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection
Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level
compensation factor at double speed
Pr. 48 Second stall prevention Pr. 66 Stall prevention operation You can set the acceleration/deceleration pattern suitable for
operation current reduction starting frequency application.
Pr. 154 Voltage reduction selection Pr. 156 Stall prevention operation

Connection
 Linear acceleration/deceleration (setting

example
during stall prevention operation selection Setting value "0"
Pr. 277 Stall prevention operation [Linear acceleration/ "0", initial value)
Pr. 157 OL signal output timer

Output frequency (Hz)

deceleration]
current switchover For the inverter operation, the output
This function monitors the output current and automatically frequency is made to change linearly (linear

Specifications
changes the output frequency to prevent the inverter from tripping acceleration/deceleration) to prevent the

Standard
due to overcurrent, overvoltage, etc. It can also limit stall motor and inverter from excessive stress to
reach the set frequency during acceleration,
prevention and fast-response current limit operation during
Time deceleration, etc. when frequency changes.
acceleration/deceleration, driving or regeneration.
In addition, torque limit which limits the output torque to the Setting value "1"  S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A

Dimension
Drawings
Outline
[S-pattern acceleration/
predetermined value can be selected. (setting "1")

Output frequency (Hz)

deceleration A]

 Stall prevention For machine tool spindle applications, etc.

If the output current exceeds the stall prevention operation level, the Used when acceleration/deceleration
output frequency of the inverter is automatically varied to reduce the fb must be made in a short time to a high-

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
speed range of not lower than Pr. 3 Base
output current.

Explanation
Diagram
frequency (fb).
 Fast-response current limit Time

If the current exceeds the limit value, the output of the inverter is  S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B
Setting value "2"
shut off to prevent an overcurrent. [S-pattern acceleration/ (setting "2")

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
 Set in Pr. 22 the percentage of the output current to the inverter rated
Set frequency (Hz)

deceleration B]
For prevention of load shifting in
current at which stall prevention operation will be performed.
conveyor and other applications.
Normally set this parameter to 150% (initial value).
Since acceleration/deceleration is always
 During high-speed operation above the rated motor frequency,
made in an S shape from current
acceleration may not be made because the motor current does not
frequency (f2) to target frequency (f1),

Parameter
increase. If operation is performed in a high frequency range, the
Output frequency (Hz)

f1

List
current at motor lockup becomes smaller than the rated output this function eases shock produced at
current of the inverter, and the protective function (OL) is not acceleration/deceleration and is effective
executed even if the motor is at a stop. f2
for load collapse prevention, etc.
To improve the operating characteristics of the motor in this case,

Explanations

Parameters
the stall prevention level can be reduced in the high frequency Time

of
range. This function is effective for performing operation up to the
high-speed range on a centrifugal separator etc. Normally, set 60Hz
in Pr. 66 and 100% in Pr. 23. Pr. 30, 70
 By setting "9999" (initial value) in Pr. 23 Stall prevention operation level Selection of regeneration unit

Protective
Functions
compensation factor at double speed, the stall prevention operation
Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty
level is constant at the Pr. 22 setting up to 400Hz.
 When making frequent starts/stops, use the optional brake resistor
Pr. 22 to increase the regeneration capability. (0.4K or higher)
When Pr. 23 = 9999

Options
 Use a power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) for continuous
Stall prevention operation

When Pr. 23 = "9999", the stall prevention operation in regeneration status.

operation level is as set in Pr. 22 to 400Hz.
Use a high power factor converter (FR-HC2) for harmonic
suppression and power factor improvement.
Instructions

(The FR-CV/FR-HC2 can be used for the standard control circuit

level (%)

Stall prevention operation level

as set in Pr. 23
terminal model or the safety stop function model.)
Pr. 66 400Hz
Output frequency (Hz)
Pr. 30 Pr. 70
 Set Pr.154 = "11" when the overvoltage protective function (E.OV) Regeneration Unit
Set Value Set Value
activates during stall prevention operation in an application with
Motor

Brake resistor (MRS type, MYS type)

large load inertia. Note that turning OFF the start signal (STF/STR) 0
Brake unit (FR-BU2)
or varying the frequency signal during stall prevention operation may (initial 
Power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)
delay the acceleration/deceleration start. value)
High power factor converter (FR-HC2)
Compatibility

 Stall prevention operation and fast response current limit function Brake resistor (MYS type)
6%
can be restricted according to the operation condition using Pr. 156. 1 (When using at 100% torque 6%ED) 
 When Pr. 277 = "1", torque limit can be set. Torque limit level can be 10/6%  High-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)
set using Pr. 22. High power factor converter (FR-HC2)
2
(when an automatic restart after —
Pr. 24 to 27
Warranty

Refer to the section about Pr. 4. instantaneous power failure is selected)

 The brake duty varies according to the inverter capacity.
 7.5K or lower/11K or higher
 Available only for the FR-E720-3.7K
Inquiry

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions. 51
 Pr. 31 to 36 Pr. 41 to 43
Avoid mechanical resonance points Detection of output frequency (SU, FU signal)
(frequency jump) Pr. 41 Up-to-frequency sensitivity Pr. 42 Output frequency detection
Pr. 43 Output frequency detection for reverse
Pr. 31 Frequency jump 1A Pr. 32 Frequency jump 1B rotation
Pr. 33 Frequency jump 2A Pr. 34 Frequency jump 2B
Pr. 35 Frequency jump 3A Pr. 36 Frequency jump 3B The inverter output frequency is detected and output at the output
signals.
When it is desired to avoid
 The Pr. 41 value can be adjusted within the range 0% ±100% on the
Set frequency (Hz)

Frequency jump
resonance attributable to Pr. 36
Pr. 35 assumption that the set frequency is 100%.
the natural frequency of a
Pr. 34
 This parameter can be used to ensure that the running frequency
mechanical system, these Pr. 33 has been reached to provide the operation start signal etc. for
parameters allow
Pr. 32 related equipment.
resonant frequencies to Pr. 31
be jumped. Set frequency Adjustment

Output frequency
range Pr.41

 Up to three areas may be set, with the jump frequencies set to either
the top or bottom point of each area.

(Hz)
 The settings of frequency jumps 1A, 2A, 3A are jump points, and Time
operation is performed at these frequencies in the jump areas.
OFF ON OFF
 Frequency jump is not performed if the initial value is set to "9999". SU

 During acceleration/deceleration, the running frequency within the  When the output frequency rises to or above the Pr. 42 setting, the
set area is valid. output frequency detection signal (FU) is output. This function can
be used for electromagnetic brake operation, open signal, etc.
 When the detection frequency is set in Pr. 43, frequency detection

Pr. 37 used exclusively for reverse rotation can also be set. This function is
effective for switching the timing of electromagnetic brake operation
Speed display between forward rotation (rise) and reverse rotation (fall) during
Pr. 37 Speed display vertical lift operation, etc.
Output frequency (Hz)

The monitor display and frequency setting of the PU (FR-PU07)

can be changed to the machine speed.
Forward
 To display the machine speed, set in Pr. 37 the machine speed for rotation Pr.42 Time
Reverse Pr.43
60Hz operation. rotation

Output Set Output signal OFF

ON OFF ON OFF
Pr. 37 Frequency Parameter FU
Frequency Frequency
Setting Setting Setting
0 (initial
Monitor Monitor
Pr. 44, 45 Refer to the section about Pr. 7.
Hz Hz Hz
value)
0.01 to Machine Machine Machine
Hz Pr. 46 Refer to the section about Pr. 0.
9998 speed  speed  speed 
 Machine speed conversion formula..........Pr.37 x frequency/60Hz
Pr. 47 Refer to the section about Pr. 3.
 Hz is displayed in 0.01Hz increments and machine speed is in 0.001. Pr. 48 Refer to the section about Pr. 22.

Pr. 51 Refer to the section about Pr. 9.

Pr. 40
RUN key rotation direction selection
Pr. 40 RUN key rotation direction selection
 Used to choose the direction of rotation by operating the RUN key of
the operation panel.

Pr. 40 Setting Description

0 Forward rotation
1 Reverse rotation

52 When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.
  The actual operation time is not added up if the cumulative operation
Pr. 52, 54, 170, 171, 268, 563, 564 time before power supply-off is less than 1h.
 When using the PU (FR-PU07), "kW" is displayed.
 The setting is available for the standard control circuit terminal model or
Change of DU/PU monitor descriptions

Features
the safety stop function model.
Cumulative monitor clear
 Writing "0" in Pr. 170 clears the cumulative power monitor.
Pr. 52 DU/PU main display data selection Pr. 54 FM terminal function selection
Pr. 170 Watt-hour meter clear Pr. 171 Operation hour meter clear  You can check the numbers of cumulative energization time monitor
Pr. 268 Monitor decimal digits selection Pr. 563 Energization time carrying-over times exceeded 65535h with Pr. 563 and the numbers of actual operation

Connection
example
Pr. 564 Operating time carrying-over times time monitor exceeded 65535h with Pr. 564.
The monitor to be displayed on the main screen of the control  Writing "0" in Pr. 171 clears the actual operation time monitor.
panel and PU (FR-PU07) can be selected.
Pr. 268

Specifications
Pr. 52 Setting
Pr. 54 Description

Standard
Types of Full-scale Setting
(FM)
Unit Operation PU Main 9999
Monitor Set Value No function
Panel LED Monitor Value (initial value)
Output frequency 0.01Hz 0/100 1 Pr. 55 For the first or second decimal places (0.1 increments or

Dimension
Output current 0.01A 0/100 2 Pr. 56 0.01 increments) of the monitor, numbers in the first

Drawings
Outline
100V, 200V class: 0 decimal place and smaller are rounded to display an
Output voltage 0.1V 0/100 3 400V integral value (1 increments).
400V class: 800V The monitor value smaller than 0.99 is displayed as 0.
Fault or alarm When 2 decimal places (0.01 increments) are monitored,
— 0/100 — —
indication

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
the 0.01 decimal place is dropped and the monitor

Explanation
Frequency 1 displays the first decimal place (0.1 increments).

Diagram
0.01Hz 5  5 Pr. 55
setting value When the monitor display digit is originally in 1
Rated torque of the increments, it is displayed unchanged in 1 increments.
Motor torque  0.1% 7  7
applied motor  2
100V, 200V class:  When Pr. 52 is set to "100", the set frequency monitor is displayed

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Converter

Parameter unit
0.1V 8  8 400V
output voltage
400V class: 800V
during a stop and the output frequency monitor is displayed during
Regenerative Brake duty set in Pr. operation. (The Hz LED blinks when stopping and is lit during
0.1% 9  9
brake duty 30 and Pr. 70 operation.)
Electronic Electronic thermal
thermal O/L 0.1% 10  10 relay function
Pr. 52

Parameter
relay load factor operation level

List
Output current 0 100
0.01A 11  11 Pr. 56
peak value During During
Converter 100V, 200V class: During stop
output voltage 0.1V 12  12 400V running/stop running

Explanations

Parameters
peak value 400V class: 800V Output Output Set frequency Output
Rated inverter
Output power  

of
0.01kW 14 14 frequency frequency frequency
power  2
Input terminal
— —  — —
Output current Output current
status
Output voltage Output voltage
Output terminal


Protective
— — — —

Functions
status Fault or alarm
Fault or alarm indication
Cumulative indication
energization 1h 20 — —
time   The set frequency displayed indicates the frequency to be output when
the start command is on.
Reference
— — 21 — Different from the frequency setting displayed when Pr. 52 = "5", the value
voltage output

Options
based on maximum/minimum frequency and frequency jump is displayed.
Actual operation
1h 23 — —
time , 
Motor load
factor
0.1% 24 24 200%
Pr. 55, 56
Instructions

Cumulative 0.01kWh 25 — —
power *5 Reference of the monitor output from
PID set point 0.1% 52 52 100%
PID measured
terminal FM
0.1% 53 53 100%
value Pr. 55 Frequency monitoring reference Pr. 56 Current monitoring reference
PID deviation 0.1% 54 — —
Set the full-scale value of the monitor value output from terminal FM.
Motor

Inverter I/O
terminal — 55 — — — Monitor* Reference Parameter Initial Value
monitor
Frequency Pr. 55 60Hz
Option input
terminal status — 56 — — — Current Pr. 56 Inverter rated current
Compatibility


Option output * Refer to the section about Pr. 52 for monitor names.
terminal status — 57 — — —
 Pulse speed(terminal FM)

Thermal relay 2400

Motor thermal
0.1% 61 61 operation level pulse/s
load factor
Warranty

(100%) 1440
Thermal relay pulse/s
Inverter thermal
0.1% 62 62 operation level
load factor
(100%)
Output frequency Pr.55 400Hz
 Selected by the PU (FR-PU07) reference
 The motor torque display remains "0" under V/F control. Output current Pr.56 500A
Inquiry

 The cumulative energization time and actual operation time are reference
accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and accumulated
again from 0. When the operation panel is used, the time is displayed up
to 65.53 (65530h) on the assumption that 1h = 0.001, and thereafter, it is
added up from 0.

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions. 53
  When Pr. 162 = "1" (initial value) or "11", automatic restart operation
Pr. 30, 57, 58, 162, 165, 299, 611 is performed in a reduced voltage system, where the voltage is
gradually risen with the output frequency unchanged from prior to an
Automatic restart operation after instantaneous power failure independently of the coasting speed of
instantaneous power failure/flying start the motor.
Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection Pr. 57 Restart coasting time Instantaneous (power failure) time
Pr. 162 Automatic restart after
Pr. 58 Restart cushion time
instantaneous power failure selection Power supply
Pr. 299 Rotation direction detection (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
Pr. 165 Stall prevention operation level for restart
selection at restarting
Pr. 611 Acceleration time at a restart Motor speed N
(r/min)
You can restart the inverter without stopping the motor in the
Inverter output
following cases: frequency f (Hz)
*

 When power comes back on after an instantaneous power failure

 When motor is coasting at start Inverter output
voltage E (V)

Pr. Setting
Description
Number Range Coasting time
0 (initial value), When MRS (X10) turns ON then OFF Pr. 57 setting Restart cushion time
(Pr. 58 setting)
1 The motor starts at the starting frequency
30 * The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition.
When MRS (X10) turns ON then OFF
2
Automatic restart operation  When "0" or "10" is set in Pr. 162, the inverter smoothly starts after
1.5K or lower....... 1s, detecting the motor speed upon power restoration. (The motor
2.2K to 7.5K ........ 2s, capacity should be equal to or one rank lower than the inverter
0
11K or higher ...... 3s capacity)
The above times are coasting time. When using the frequency search, perform offline auto tuning.
57
Set the waiting time for inverter-triggered Also be noted that there is a wiring length limit. (Refer to page 89)
0.1 to 5s
restart after an instantaneous power failure.  Even when the motor is rotating in the opposite direction, the
9999 inverter can be restarted smoothly as the direction of rotation is
No restart
(initial value) detected. (You can select whether to make rotation direction
58 0 to 60s Set a voltage starting time at restart. detection or not with Pr. 299 Rotation direction detection selection at
Frequency search only performed at the restarting.)
0
first start
Instantaneous (power failure) time
Reduced voltage start only at the first start
1 (initial value) Power supply
162 (no frequency search) (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)

10 Frequency search at every start Motor speed N

Reduced voltage start at every start (r/min)
11
(no frequency search) Inverter output *
frequency f (Hz)
Considers the inverter rated current as
165 0 to 200% 100% and sets the stall prevention Inverter output
voltage E (V)
operation level during restart operation. Restart cushion time
0 (initial value) Without rotation direction detection Coasting time Speed (Pr. 58 setting)
+
(Pr. 57 ) detection time
1 With rotation direction detection
When Pr. 78 = 0, the rotation direction is * The output shut off timing differs Acceleration time
299 according to the load condition. at a restart
detected. (Pr. 611 setting)
9999
When Pr. 78 = 1, 2, the rotation direction is  Restart operation after turning MRS (X10) signal ON then OFF can
not detected. be selected using Pr. 30. Set when restart operation after
Acceleration time to reach Pr. 20 instantaneous power failure is selected while using the high power
0 to 3600s Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency factor converter (FR-HC2).
611 at a restart. (The FR-HC2 can be used for the standard control circuit terminal
9999 Acceleration time for restart is the normal model or the safety stop function model.)
(initial value) acceleration time (e.g. Pr. 7).

54 When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.
 Pr. 59 Pr. 61 to 63, 292, 293
Remote setting function Automatic acceleration/deceleration

Features
Pr. 59 Remote function selection Pr. 61 Reference current Pr. 62 Reference value at acceleration
Pr. 63 Reference value at deceleration Pr. 292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration
 If the operation panel is located away from the enclosure, you can
Pr. 293 Acceleration/deceleration separate selection
use contact signals to perform continuous variable-speed operation,
The inverter automatically sets appropriate parameters for

Connection
without using analog signals.

example
 By merely setting this parameter, you can use the acceleration, operation.
deceleration and setting clear functions of the motorized speed  The inverter operates in the same conditions as when appropriate
setter (FR-FK). values are set in each parameter even if acceleration/deceleration

Specifications
time and V/F pattern are not set. This operation mode is useful when

Standard
Description you just want to operate, etc. without fine parameter setting.
Pr. 59 Setting RH, RM, RL signal Frequency setting  If the automatic acceleration/deceleration has been selected,
function storage function inputting the jog or RT (second function selection) signal during an
0 (initial value) Multi-speed setting — inverter stop will switch to the normal operation and give priority to

Dimension
Drawings
Outline
1 Remote setting With JOG operation or second function selection.
2 Remote setting Not used After automatic acceleration/deceleration operation has been
Not used started, none of JOG signal and RT signal are accepted.
3 Remote setting (Turning off STF/STR clears

Terminal Specification
remotely set frequency)

Terminal Connection
Automatic

Explanation
Pr. 292

Diagram
Operation Setting
Setting
Output frequency (Hz)

When Pr. 59 = 1, 2 When Pr. 59 = 1

Parameter
When Pr. 59 = 3
When Pr. 59 = 2, 3
0

Operation panel

FR Configurator
∗

Parameter unit
(initial value — —
0Hz
normal mode)
0 Time
Acceleration
(RH) ON ON ON 1
Deceleration (shortest Without brake
(RM) ON
Set when you want
Clear (RL) ON
acceleration/ resistor and

Parameter
Forward rotation
brake unit to accelerate/
(STF) ON ON ON ON deceleration

List
decelerate the motor
Power supply ON ON
mode)
 External running frequency (other than multi-speed) or PU running for the shortest time. Pr. 7, Pr. 8
11
frequency (stall prevention
(shortest With brake

Explanations
operation level

Parameters
acceleration/ resistor and
brake unit 150%)

of
Pr. 60 deceleration
mode)
Energy saving control selection V/F
With
Operation mode in
which a mechanical

Protective
Functions
Pr. 60 Energy saving control selection 7 mechanical
(brake sequence brake opening brake operation
Without a fine parameter setting, the inverter automatically mode 1) completion timing signal for
performs energy saving operation. This function is optimum for fan signal input vertical lift
and pump applications. This function is valid for V/F control only. applications is
—

Options
output.
Pr. 60 Setting Description Without (The setting is not
8 mechanical
0 (initial value) Normal operation mode (brake sequence brake opening available for the FL
Optimum excitation control mode mode 2) completion remote
Instructions

The optimum excitation control mode is a control signal input communication

9 system which controls excitation current to improve the model.)
motor efficiency to maximum and determines output  Use Pr. 61 to Pr. 63 to change the reference current for the shortest
voltage as an energy saving system.  acceleration/deceleration mode and optimum acceleration/
 Output current may slightly increase, since output voltage is controlled. deceleration mode.
Motor

 Calculation of acceleration/deceleration can be performed

individually. This function is made valid in the shortest acceleration/
deceleration mode.
Compatibility

Pr. 293 Setting Description

0 (initial value) Both acceleration/deceleration time is calculated.
1 Only acceleration time is calculated.
2 Only deceleration time is calculated.
Warranty
Inquiry

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions. 55
 Pr. 65, 67 to 69 Pr. 71, 450
Retry function at fault occurrence Motor selection (applied motor)
Pr. 65 Retry selection Pr. 67 Number of retries at fault occurrence Pr. 71 Applied motor Pr. 450 Second applied motor
Pr. 68 Retry waiting time Pr. 69 Retry count display erase
Setting of the used motor selects the thermal characteristic
If a fault occurs, the inverter resets itself automatically to restart. appropriate for the motor. Setting is required to use a constant-
You can also select the fault description for a retry. torque motor. Thermal characteristic of the electronic thermal relay
When you have selected automatic restart after instantaneous function suitable for the motor is set.
power failure (Pr. 57 Restart coasting time  9999), restart operation
Pr. 71, Thermal Characteristic
is performed at the retry operation time which is the same of that of Pr. 450 of the Electronic
Setting Used Motor Thermal Relay Function
a power failure.
Pr. 71 Pr. 450 Standard Constant-torque
 Use Pr. 65 to select the fault to be activated for retries.
Standard motor (such as SF-JR)
"" indicates the alarms selected for retry. 0 
(Pr. 71 initial value)
Fault Display Pr. 65 Setting Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque
1 
0 1 2 3 4 5 motor (such as SF-JRCA)
for Retry
Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency
E.OC1      40 — 
motor (SF-HR)
E.OC2    
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque
E.OC3      50 — 
motor (SF-HRCA)
E.OV1     3 — Standard motor 
E.OV2     Constant-torque
E.OV3     13 — 
motor
E.THM  Mitsubishi Electric
E.THT  standard motor
23 — 
E. BE   (SF-JR 4P 1.5kW Select "Offline
E. GF   or lower) auto tuning
Mitsubishi Electric setting"
E.OHT 
43 — high efficiency 
E.OLT  
motor (SF-HR)
E.OP1  
Mitsubishi Electric
E. PE   53 — constant-torque 
E.MB4   motor (SF-HRCA)
E.MB5   4 — Standard motor 
E.MB6   Constant-torque
E.MB7   14 — 
motor
E.USB   Mitsubishi Electric
E.ILF   standard motor Auto tuning
24 — 
(SF-JR 4P 1.5kW data can
or lower) be read,
 Set the number of retries at fault occurrence in Pr. 67. changed,
Mitsubishi Electric
Pr. 67 Setting Description 44 — high efficiency and set. 
motor (SF-HR)
0 (initial value) No retry function
Mitsubishi Electric
Set the number of retries at fault occurrence. 54 — constant-torque 
1 to 10
A fault output is not provided during retry operation. motor (SF-HRCA)
Set the number of retries at fault occurrence. 5 — Standard motor  
(The setting value of minus 100 is the number of Constant-torque Direct input
101 to 110 15 — 
retries.) motor  of motor
A fault output is provided during retry operation. constants is
6 — Standard motor  
Constant-torque enabled
 Use Pr. 68 to set the waiting time from when the inverter trips until a 16 — 
motor 
retry is made in the range 0.1 to 360s.
— 9999 Without second applied motor (Pr. 450 initial value)
 Reading the Pr. 69 value provides the cumulative number of
 Star connection
successful restart times made by retry. (Use setting value "0" to  Delta connection
clear.)  For the 5.5K and 7.5K, the Pr. 0 Torque boost and Pr. 12 DC injection
brake operation voltage settings are automatically changed according
Pr. 66 Refer to the section about Pr. 22. to the Pr. 71 settings as follows.

Pr. 67 to 69 Refer to the section about Pr. 65. Automatic Change Standard Motor Constant-torque
Parameter Setting Motor Setting 
Pr. 70 Refer to the section about Pr. 30. Pr. 0 3% 2%
Pr. 12 4% 2%
 Pr. 71 setting: 0, 3 to 6, 23, 24, 40, 43, 44
 Pr. 71 setting: 1, 13 to 16, 50, 53, 54

56 When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.
 Pr. 72, 240 Pr. 75
Carrier frequency and Soft-PWM Reset selection, disconnected PU

Features
selection detection
Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection Pr. 240 Soft-PWM operation selection Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU
detection/PU stop selection
You can change the motor sound.
You can select the reset input acceptance, disconnected PU (FR-

Connection
example
Pr. Setting
Description PU07) connector detection function and PU stop function.
Number Range
PWM carrier frequency can be changed. The Pr. 75 Disconnected PU Stop
setting is in [kHz]. Reset Selection
Setting PU Detection Selection

Specifications
72 0 to 15
Note that 0 indicates 0.7kHz and 15 indicates

Standard
14.5kHz. Reset input normally If the PU is
0
enabled disconnected,
0 Soft-PWM is invalid Pressing
240 Reset input is enabled operation will be
1 When Pr. 72 = "0 to 5", Soft-PWM is valid. 1
only when a fault occurs. continued. decelerates the
Reset input normally When the PU is motor to a stop
Pr. 73, 267

Dimension
2

Drawings
enabled only in the PU

Outline
disconnected,
Reset input is enabled the inverter operation mode.
Analog input selection 3
only when a fault occurs. output is shut off.
Pr. 73 Analog input selection Pr. 267 Terminal 4 input selection 14
Reset input normally If the PU is
(initial

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
enabled disconnected, Pressing
 You can select the function that switches between forward rotation value)

Explanation
Diagram
operation will be decelerates the
and reverse rotation according to the analog input terminal Reset input is enabled
15 continued. motor to a stop in
specifications and analog input level. only when a fault occurs.
any of the PU,
Reset input normally When the PU is
 Either voltage input (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V) or current input (4 to 20mA) 16 external and
enabled disconnected,

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
can be selected for terminals 4 used for analog input. communication
Reset input is enabled the inverter
Set the voltage/current input switch in the "V" position to select 17 operation modes.
only when a fault occurs. output is shut off.
voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to10V) and "I" position to select current input
 Reset selection
(4 to 20mA), and change the parameter setting (Pr. 267).
You can select the operation timing of reset function (RES signal,
( indicates main speed setting)

Parameter
reset command through communication) input.

List
 Disconnected PU detection
Pr. 73 Terminal 2 Reversible
Terminal 4 Input This function detects that the PU (FR-PU07) has been disconnected
Setting Input Operation
0 0 to 10V from the inverter for longer than 1s and causes the inverter to

Explanations
provide a fault output (E.PUE) and come to trip. (This function

Parameters
1 Not function
0 to 5V When the AU signal is off
(initial value) cannot be used for the FL remote communication model and the

of

10 0 to 10V CC-Link communication model.)
Yes
11 0 to 5V  PU stop selection
0 When the AU signal is on In any of the PU operation, External operation and Network

Protective
1 

Functions
According to Pr. 267 setting Not function
operation modes, the motor can be stopped by pressing of the
(initial value) 0:4 to 20mA (initial value) PU.
10 1:0 to 5V
 Yes
11 2:0 to 10V

Reverse Forward Pr. 77

Options
Set frequency (Hz)

rotation rotation
Pr. 125
Reversible Prevention of parameter rewrite
Pr. 77 Parameter write selection
Not
You can select whether write to various parameters can be
Instructions

reversible
performed or not. Use this function to prevent parameter values
Terminal 2
C2 (Pr. 902) from being rewritten by misoperation.
0 2.5V 5V input (V)
C3 (Pr.902) C4 (Pr.903) Pr. 77 Setting Description
Frequency setting signal
0 (initial value) Write is enabled only during a stop.
Motor

1 Parameter cannot be written.

Parameter writing is enabled in any operation mode
Pr. 74 2 regardless of operation status. (There are some
parameters that cannot be written.)
Response level of analog input and
Compatibility

noise elimination
Pr. 74 Input filter time constant Pr. 78
 The time constant of the primary delay filter can be set for the
Prevention of reverse rotation of the
Warranty

external frequency command (analog input (terminal 2, 4) signal).

 Effective for filtering noise in the frequency setting circuit. motor
 Increase the filter time constant if steady operation cannot be Pr. 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection
performed due to noise. A larger setting results in slower This function can prevent reverse rotation fault resulting from the
response. (The time constant can be set between approximately incorrect input of the start signal.
Inquiry

5ms to 1s with the setting of 0 to 8.)

Pr. 78 Setting Description
0 (initial value) Both forward and reverse rotations allowed
1 Reverse rotation disabled
2 Forward rotation disallowed

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions. 57
  Specify the operation mode at power on (Pr. 340)
Pr. 79, 340  When power is switched on or when power comes back on after
instantaneous power failure, the inverter can be started up in the
Operation mode selection Network operation mode. After the inverter has started up in the
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection Pr. 340 Communication startup mode selection Network operation mode, parameter write and operation can be
 Used to select the operation mode of the inverter. performed from a program.
Mode can be changed as desired between operation using external Set this mode for communication operation using the inverter RS-
signals (external operation), operation from the PU (FR-PU07), 485 communication or communication option.
combined operation of PU operation and external operation  You can set the operation mode at power on (reset) according to
the Pr. 79 and Pr. 340 settings.
(external/PU combined operation), and network operation (when
RS-485 communication or a communication option is used) Operation Mode at
(For the CC-Link communication model, the operation can be Pr. 340 Pr. 79 Power-on, Power Operation Mode
switched between the NET and PU modes.) Setting Setting Restoration, Switching
. Reset
Pr. 79 LED Indication 0
Description : OFF (initial As set in Pr. 79.
Setting : ON value)
PU operation
Can be switched to
mode
0 NET operation mode external, PU or NET
Use external/PU switchover mode
operation mode
0 External Fixed to PU operation
(press to switch between the PU and
operation mode 1 PU operation mode
(initial mode
External operation mode.
value) Switching between the
At power on, the inverter is placed in the
NET operation external and NET
External operation mode.
mode
operation mode is
2 NET operation mode
enabled
PU operation Switching to PU
mode operation mode disabled
1 Fixed to PU operation mode
External/PU combined Operation mode
1 3, 4
External operation mode switching disabled
operation mode Switching among the
Fixed to External operation mode
external, PU, and NET
Operation can be performed by switching 6 NET operation mode
2 operation mode is
between the external and Net operation NET operation
mode enabled while running.
mode.
Can be switched to
X12 (MRS) signal ON
external, PU or NET
External/PU combined operation mode 1 .. NET operation mode
operation mode
Frequency command Start command
7 Fixed to External
Operation panel and X12 (MRS) signal ON
PU (FR-PU07) setting operation mode (forcibly
External signal .. External operation
3 or external signal input input switched to External
mode
(multi-speed setting, operation mode)
across terminals 4-5 (terminal STF,
External/PU Switching between the
(valid when AU signal STR)
combined 0 NET operation mode PU and Net operation
turns on)). operation mode
External/PU combined operation mode 2 mode is enabled
Frequency command Start command Fixed to PU operation
1 PU operation mode
Input from the mode
External signal input operation panel Fixed to NET operation
4 2 NET operation mode
(terminal 2, 4, JOG, and the PU (FR- mode
multi-speed selection, PU07) External/PU
Operation mode
etc.) 3, 4 combined operation
( ) 10 switching disabled
mode
Switchover mode
PU operation Switching between the
Switch among PU operation, external
6 mode PU and NET operation
operation, and NET operation while 6 NET operation mode
mode is enabled while
keeping the same operating status.
External running
External operation mode (PU operation
interlock) operation mode Fixed to External
X12 signal ON External operation operation mode (forcibly
Operation mode can be switched to the 7
7 PU operation mode. NET operation mode switched to External
(output stop during external operation) mode operation mode)
X12 signal OFF  Operation mode cannot be directly changed between the PU operation
Operation mode cannot be switched to mode and Network operation mode
the PU operation mode.
 Operation mode can be changed between the PU operation mode and

Network operation mode with key of the operation panel and X65
signal.

58 When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.
 Pr. 80, 81, 89, 800 Pr. 82 to 84, 90 to 94, 96, 298, 859
Selection of control method and control Offline auto tuning

Features
mode AD MFVC GP MFVC Pr. 82 Motor excitation current
Pr. 84 Rated motor frequency
Pr. 83 Rated motor voltage
Pr. 90 Motor constant (R1)
Pr. 80 Motor capacity Pr. 81 Number of motor poles Pr. 92 Motor constant (L1)/d-shaft
Pr. 89 Speed control gain (Advanced magnetic flux Pr. 91 Motor constant (R2)
Pr. 800 Control method selection inductance
vector)

Connection
Pr. 93 Motor constant (L2)/q-shaft

example
Pr. 94 Motor constant (X)
inductance
Advanced magnetic flux vector control and general-purpose
Pr. 96 Auto tuning setting/status Pr. 298 Frequency search gain
magnetic flux vector control can be selected by setting the motor Pr. 859 Torque current
capacity, number of poles in Pr. 80 and Pr. 81. Selection of Offline auto tuning operation for automatic calculation of motor

Specifications
advanced magnetic flux vector control or general-purpose

Standard
constants can be executed when using advanced magnetic flux
magnetic flux vector control can be made by Pr. 800. vector control and general-purpose magnetic flux vector control.
Parameter Setting When offline auto tuning is performed under V/F control, Pr. 298
Description Frequency search gain necessary for frequency search for automatic
Number Range

Dimension
Drawings
Outline
0.1 to 15kW Set the applied motor capacity. restart after instantaneous power failure is set as well as the motor
80 9999 constants (R1).
V/F control
(initial value) Parameter Setting
2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Set the number of motor poles.
Description
Number Range

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection

Explanation
81 9999

Diagram
V/F control 0
(initial value) (initial Without offline auto tuning
20 value)
Advanced magnetic flux vector control 
(initial value) Offline auto tuning for advanced magnetic
800

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
General-purpose magnetic flux vector 1
30 flux vector control
control 
96 Offline auto tuning for general-purpose
 Set a value other than "9999" in Pr. 80 and Pr. 81.
11 magnetic flux vector control
 The motor speed fluctuation at load fluctuation can be adjusted (compatible with FR-E500 series)
using Pr. 89.

Parameter
Offline auto tuning for V/F control

List
21 (automatic restart after instantaneous power
failure (with frequency search))

 You can copy the offline auto tuning data (motor constants) to

Explanations

Parameters
another inverter with the PU (FR-PU07).

of
 Even if a motor other than the Mitsubishi Electric standard motor
(SF-JR 0.2kW or higher), high-efficiency motor (SF-HR 0.2kW or
higher), or Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA 4P,

Protective
SF-HRCA 0.2 to 15kW) (such as other manufacturer's motor or SF-

Functions
JRC motor) is used, or the wiring length is long (30m or more as a
reference), a motor can run with the optimum operation
characteristics by using the offline auto tuning function.
 Offline auto tuning conditions

Options
 A motor should be connected.
 The motor capacity is equal to or one rank lower than the inverter
capacity.
(note that the capacity should be 0.1kW or more)
Instructions

 The maximum frequency is 120Hz.

 A high-slip motor, high-speed motor and special motor cannot be
tuned.
 As the motor may run slightly, fix the motor securely with a
mechanical brake or make sure that there will be no problem in
Motor

safety if the motor runs.

* This instruction must be followed especially in elevator.
Note that if the motor runs slightly, tuning performance is unaffected.
Compatibility

Pr. 89 Refer to the section about Pr. 80.

Warranty
Inquiry

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions. 59
 Pr. Setting
Pr. 117 to 124, 342, 343, 502, 549 Number Range
Description

Communication initial setting At alarm Error At error

Indication
occurrence output removal
Pr. 117 PU communication station number Pr. 118 PU communication speed 0 (initial
Pr. 119 PU communication stop bit length Pr. 120 PU communication parity check Coasts to Stop
value) E.PUE Output
Pr. 121 Number of PU communication stop. (E.PUE)
Pr. 122 PU communication check time interval 3
retries 502
Pr. 123 PU communication waiting time setting Pr. 124 PU communication CR/LF selection Decelerates After stop OutputStop
1
Pr. 342 Communication EEPROM write selection Pr. 343 Communication error count to stop E.PUE after stop
(E.PUE)
Pr. 502 Stop mode selection at communication error Pr. 549 Protocol selection Automatic
Decelerates After stop Without
2 restart
(1) Initial settings and specifications of RS-485 to stop E.PUE output
functions
communication (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124)  When making communication through MODBUS RTU protocol (Pr. 549 =
Used to perform required settings for RS-485 communication "1"), the setting range within parenthesis is applied.
between the inverter and personal computer.
 Use PU connector of the inverter for communication. (2) Communication EEPROM write selection (Pr. 342)
 You can perform parameter setting, monitoring, etc. using When parameter write is performed from the inverter PU
the Mitsubishi inverter protocol or MODBUS RTU protocol. connector, USB communication, and communication option,
 To make communication between the personal computer parameters storage device can be changed from EEPROM +
and inverter, initialization of the communication RAM to RAM only. Set when a frequent parameter change is
specifications must be made to the inverter. necessary.
Data communication cannot be made if the initial settings
are not made or there is any setting error.
(3) MODBUS RTU communication specifications (Pr.
Pr. Setting 343, Pr. 549)
Description
Number Range
Pr. Setting
Specify the inverter station number. Description
0 to 31 Number Range
Set the inverter station numbers when two or
117 (0 to 247)
more inverters are connected to one personal Displays the number of communication
 343 — errors during MODBUS RTU
computer.
communication. (Reading only)
Set the communication speed.
The setting value  100 equals the 0 (initial Mitsubishi inverter (computer link
48, 96,
118 communication speed. 549 value) operation) protocol
192, 384
For example, the communication speed is 1 MODBUS RTU protocol
19200bps when the setting value is 192.
Stop bit length Data length
0 1bit
1 (initial 8bit
119 2bit
value)
10 1bit
7bit
11 2bit
0 Without parity check
1 With odd parity check
120
2 (initial
With even parity check
value)
Set the permissible number of retries at
occurrence of a data receive error. If the number
0 to 10
of consecutive errors exceeds the permissible
121
value, the inverter trips.
If a communication error occurs, the inverter will
9999
not come to trip.
RS-485 communication can be made
0 (initial Note that a communication error (E.PUE) occurs
value) as soon as the inverter is switched to the
operation mode with control source.
122
Sets the interval of communication check time.
0.1 to
If a no-communication state persists for longer
999.8s
than the permissible time, the inverter trips.
9999 No communication check
0 to Set the waiting time between data transmission
150ms to the inverter and response.
123 9999
(initial Set with communication data.
value)
0 Without CR/LF
1 (initial
124 With CR
value)
2 With CR/LF

60 When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.
 Pr. 125, 126, 241, C2 (902) to C7 (905), C22 (922) to C25 (923) Pr. 127 to 134
Analog input frequency change and PID control, dancer control

Features
adjustment (calibration) Pr. 127 PID control automatic switchover frequency Pr. 128 PID action selection
Pr. 129 PID proportional band Pr. 130 PID integral time
Pr. 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency Pr. 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency
Pr. 131 PID upper limit Pr. 132 PID lower limit
Pr. 241 Analog input display unit switchover C2 (Pr. 902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency
Pr. 133 PID action set point Pr. 134 PID differential time
C3 (Pr. 902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias C4 (Pr. 903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain

Connection
example
C5(Pr. 904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency C6 (Pr. 904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias  The inverter can be used to exercise process control, e.g. flow rate,
C22 (Pr. 922) Frequency setting air volume or pressure.
C7 (Pr. 905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain voltage bias frequency (built-in
The terminal 2 input signal or parameter setting is used as a set
potentiometer)
C23 (Pr. 922) Frequency setting C24 (Pr. 923) Frequency setting voltage point and the terminal 4 input signal used as a feedback value to

Specifications
voltage bias (built-in potentiometer) gain frequency (built-in potentiometer)

Standard
constitute a feedback system for PID control.
C25 (Pr. 923) Frequency setting
voltage gain (built-in potentiometer)  Pr. 128 = "20, 21" (measured value input)
You can set the magnitude (slope) of the output frequency as desired Inverter circuit
Pr. 133 Manipulated Motor
in relation to the frequency setting signal (0 to 5VDC, 0 to 10V or 4 to or terminal 2
PID operation

Dimension
variable

Drawings
+- 1 IM

Outline
20mA). Set point Kp 1+
Ti S
+Td S
0 to 5VDC
C22 (Pr. 922) to C25 (Pr. 923) is available when the operation panel (0 to 10VDC) Terminal 4
Feedback signal (measured value) 4 to 20mADC (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V)
(PA02) for the FR-E500 series is connected with cable. You can
Kp: Proportionality constant Ti: Integral time S: Operator Td: Differential time
calibrate the operation panel built-in potentiometer.

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
 Performs PID control by feedbacking the position signal of the

Explanation
(1) Change the frequency at maximum analog input

Diagram
dancer roller, controlling the dancer roller is in the specified position.
(Pr. 125, Pr. 126) Performs dancer control by setting 40 to 43 in Pr. 128 PID action
Set Pr. 125 (Pr. 126) when changing only frequency setting selection. The main speed command is the speed command of each
(gain) of the maximum analog input voltage (current). (Other

Operation panel

FR Configurator
operation mode (external, PU, communication). Performs PID

Parameter unit
settings need not be changed.) control by the position detection signal of the dancer roller, then the
result is added to the main speed command.
(2) Analog input bias/gain calibration
(C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905))

Parameter
 The "bias" and "gain" functions are designed to adjust the
Pr. 145

List
relationships between the output frequency and the setting
input signal, e.g. 0 to 5VDC/0 to 10VDC or 4 to 20mADC PU display language selection
entered from outside the inverter. Pr. 145 PU display language selection

Explanations

Parameters
You can switch the display language of the PU (FR-PU07) to
Output frequency (Hz)

Initial value

of
60Hz another.

Pr. 145 Setting Description

Protective
Functions
Gain 0 (initial value) Japanese
Pr. 125 1 English
Bias
2 German
C2 (Pr. 902)
3 French
0 100%
0 5V 4 Spanish
Frequency setting signal

Options
0 10V 5 Italian
C3 (Pr. 902) C4 (Pr. 903)
6 Swedish
7 Finnish
Output frequency (Hz)

Initial value
60Hz
Instructions

Pr. 146
Gain Built-in potentiometer switching
Bias Pr. 126
C5 (Pr. 904)
Pr. 146 Built-in potentiometer switching
Motor

0 20 100% When connecting the operation panel (PA02) of the FR-E500

0 4 Frequency setting 20mA
C6 (Pr. 904)
signal
C7 (Pr. 905)
series with a cable, use Pr. 146 Built-in potentiometer switching for
selecting the operation using the built-in frequency setting
(3) Analog input display unit changing (Pr. 241)
Compatibility

potentiometer, or using [UP/DOWN] key.

 You can change the analog input display unit (%/V/mA) for
Pr. 146 Setting Description
analog input bias/gain calibration.
0 Built-in frequency setting potentiometer gain
1 (initial value) Digital frequency setting by the [UP/DOWN] key.
Warranty

Frequency setting with the built-in frequency setting

9999 potentiometer is available when the frequency set by
[UP/DOWN] key is "0Hz".

Pr. 147
Inquiry

Refer to the section about Pr. 7.

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions. 61
 Pr. 150 to 153 Pr. 160, 172 to 174
Detection of output current (Y12 signal) User group function
Detection of zero current (Y13 signal) Pr. 160 User group read selection Pr. 172 User group registered display/batch clear
Pr. 173 User group registration Pr. 174 User group clear
Pr. 150 Output current detection level Pr. 151 Output current detection signal delay time
Pr. 152 Zero current detection level Pr. 153 Zero current detection time  Parameter which can be read from the operation panel and PU (FR-
The output power during inverter running can be detected and PU07) can be restricted.
output to the output terminal. The inverter is set to display all parameters with initial setting.

(1) Output current detection Pr. 160

Description
(Y12 signal, Pr. 150, Pr. 151) Setting
0
 The output current detection function can be used for
(initial All parameters are displayed.
excessive torque detection, etc.
value)
 If the output current remains at the Pr.150 setting or higher
1 Only the parameters registered in the user group can be displayed.
during inverter operation for the time set in Pr.151 or 9999 Only the simple mode parameters can be displayed.
longer, the output current detection (Y12) signal is output
from the inverter's open collector or relay output terminal.  User group function (Pr. 160, Pr. 172 to Pr. 174)
 The user group function is designed to display only the
parameters necessary for setting.
 From among all parameters, a maximum of 16 parameters can
Pr. 150 be registered in the user group. When "1" is set in Pr. 160 , only
parameters registered in the user group can be accessed for
Output current

Pr. 151 reading and writing. (The parameters not registered in the user
group cannot be read.)
Time  Set parameter numbers in Pr. 173 to register parameters in
100ms the user group.
Output current
detection signal
OFF ON OFF  To delete a parameter from the user group, set its parameter
(Y12) number in Pr. 174. To batch-delete the registered parameters,
(2) Zero current detection (Y13 signal, Pr. 152, Pr. 153) set Pr. 172 to "9999".
 If the output current remains at the Pr.152 setting or lower
during inverter operation for the time set in Pr.153 or
longer, the output current detection (Y12) signal is output Pr. 161, 295
from the inverter's open collector or relay output terminal.
Operation selection of the operation
panel
Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation
Output current

Pr. 295 Magnitude of frequency change setting

selection
 The setting dial of the operation panel can be used for setting

Pr. 152
like a potentiometer.
Pr. 152
0[A]
100ms∗ Time
 The key operation of the operation panel can be disabled.
OFF ON
Start signal
Pr. 161 Setting Description
Zero current
detection time OFF ON OFF ON 0 (initial value) Setting dial frequency setting mode
(Y13) Key lock invalid
Pr. 153 Pr. 153 1 Setting dial potentiometer mode
Detection time Detection time
10 Setting dial frequency setting mode
Key lock valid
11 Setting dial potentiometer mode

Pr. 154, 156, 157 Refer to the section about Pr. 22.  When setting the set frequency with the setting dial, the
frequency setting increments of the setting dial can be changed,
in proportion as the rotated amount of the setting dial (speed).

Pr. 162, 165 Refer to the section about Pr. 57.

Pr. 168, 169 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.

Pr. 170, 171 Refer to the section about Pr. 52.

Pr. 172 to 174 Refer to the section about Pr. 160.

62 When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.
 Pr. 178 to 184 Pr. 190 to 192
Function assignment of input terminal Terminal assignment of output terminal

Features
Pr. 178 STF terminal function selection Pr. 179 STR terminal function selection Pr. 190 RUN terminal function selection Pr. 191 FU terminal function selection
Pr. 180 RL terminal function selection Pr. 181 RM terminal function selection Pr. 192 A,B,C terminal function selection
Pr. 182 RH terminal function selection Pr. 183 MRS terminal function selection
You can change the functions of the open collector output terminal
Pr. 184 RES terminal function selection
and relay output terminal.

Connection
example
Use these parameters to select/change the input terminal
Pr. 190 to Pr. 192
functions. Setting
Signal Functions
Pr. 178 to Positive Negative
Pr. 184 Signal Functions logic logic

Specifications
Standard
Setting 0 100 RUN Inverter running
Pr. 59 = 0 (initial Low-speed operation 1 101 SU Up to frequency
value) command 3 103 OL Overload alarm
4 104 FU Output frequency detection
Remote setting (setting
0 RL Pr. 59  0  7 107 RBP Regenerative brake pre-alarm
clear)

Dimension
Drawings
8 108 THP Electronic thermal O/L relay pre-alarm

Outline
Stop-on contact selection
Pr. 270 = 1  11 111 RY Inverter operation ready
0
12 112 Y12 Output current detection
Pr. 59 = 0 (initial Middle-speed operation 13 113 Y13 Zero current detection
value) command 14 114 FDN PID lower limit

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
1 RM
Remote setting

Explanation
15 115 FUP PID upper limit

Diagram
Pr. 59  0 
(deceleration) 16 116 RL PID forward/reverse rotation output
Pr. 59 = 0 (initial High-speed operation 20 120 BOF Brake opening request
value) command 25 125 FAN Fan fault output
2 RH

Operation panel

FR Configurator
26 126 FIN Heatsink overheat pre-alarm

Parameter unit
Remote setting
Pr. 59  0  During deceleration due to instantaneous
(acceleration) 46 146 Y46
Second function selection power failure (retained until release)
3 RT 47 147 PID During PID control activated
Pr. 270 = 1  Stop-on contact selection 1
4 AU Terminal 4 input selection  64 164 Y64 During retry
68 168 EV 24V external power supply operation 

Parameter
5 JOG Jog operation selection 
80 180 SAFE Safety monitor output 

List
7 OH External thermal relay input 
81 181 SAFE2 Safety monitor output 2 
15-speed selection
8 REX 90 190 Y90 Life alarm
(combination with three speeds RL, RM, RH)
91 191 Y91 Fault output 3 (power-off signal)

Explanations
Inverter operation enable signal

Parameters
10 X10 93 193 Y93 Current average value monitor signal
(FR-HC2/FR-CV connection)  95 195 Y95 Maintenance timer signal

of
12 X12 PU operation external interlock  96 196 REM Remote output
14 X14 PID control valid terminal 98 198 LF Alarm output
15 BRI Brake opening completion signal 99 199 ALM Fault output

Protective
Functions
16 X16 PU-external operation switchover  9999 — No function
V/F switchover  The setting is available for the safety stop function model (with the FR-
18 X18 E7DS) and CC-Link communication model.
(V/F control is exercised when X18 is ON)
24 MRS Output stop  The setting is available for the safety stop function model and CC-Link
communication model.
25 STOP Start self-holding selection 
Pr. 232 to 239
Options
Forward rotation command Refer to the section about Pr. 4.
60 STF
(assigned to STF terminal (Pr. 178) only) 

61 STR
Reverse rotation command Pr. 240 Refer to the section about Pr. 72.
(assigned to STR terminal (Pr. 179) only) 
Pr. 241 Refer to the section about Pr. 125.
Instructions

62 RES Inverter reset 

65 X65 PU/NET operation switchover 
66 X66 External/NET operation switchover 
67 X67 Command source switchover 
9999 — No function
Motor

 When Pr. 59 Remote function selection  "0", the functions of the RL, RM
and RH signals change as listed above.
 When Pr. 270 = "1", the functions of the RL and RT signals change as
listed above.
 The OH signal turns on when the relay contact "opens".
Compatibility

 For the safety stop function model, the setting in Pr. 183 MRS terminal
function selection is valid only during the communication operation.
 The setting is not available for the CC-Link communication model.
Warranty
Inquiry

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions. 63
 Pr. 244 Pr. 250
Increase cooling fan life Selection of motor stopping method and
Pr. 244 Cooling fan operation selection start signal
You can control the operation of the cooling fan (FR-E720-1.5K or Pr. 250 Stop selection
higher, FR-E740-1.5K or higher, FR-E720S-0.75K or higher) built Used to select the stopping method (deceleration to a stop or
in the inverter.
coasting) when the start signal turns off.
Pr. 244 Setting Description Used to stop the motor with a mechanical brake, etc. together with
Operates in power-on status.
switching off of the start signal.
0 Cooling fan on/off control invalid
(the cooling fan is always on at power on) You can also select the operations of the start signals (STF/STR).
Cooling fan on/off control valid Description
1 The fan is always on while the inverter is running. Pr. 250
Start signal
(initial value) During a stop, the inverter status is monitored and Setting Stop operation
(STF/STR)
the fan switches on-off according to the temperature. STF signal: The motor is coasted to a
Forward rotation start stop when the preset time
0 to 100s
STR signal: elapses after the start signal
Reverse rotation start is turned off.
Pr. 245 to 247 STF signal: Start signal The motor is coasted to a
1000s to 1100s STR signal: stop (Pr. 250 - 1000)s after
Slip compensation V/F GP MFVC Forward/reverse signal the start signal is turned off.
Pr. 245 Rated slip Pr. 246 Slip compensation time constant STF signal:
Pr. 247 Constant-power range slip Forward rotation start
9999
compensation selection STR signal: When the start signal is
Reverse rotation start turned off, the motor
The inverter output current may be used to assume motor slip to STF signal: Start signal decelerates to stop.
keep the motor speed constant. 8888 STR signal:
Forward/reverse signal

Pr. 249 When "9999 (initial value) or 8888" is set in Pr. 250

Earth (ground) fault detection at start Output

frequency
Deceleration starts
when start signal turns OFF
(Hz)
Pr. 249 Earth (ground) fault detection at start
Deceleration time
(Time set in Pr. 8, etc.)
You can choose whether to make earth (ground) fault detection at
start valid or invalid. Earth (ground) fault detection is executed only DC brake
Time
right after the start signal is input to the inverter. Start signal ON OFF

Pr. 249 Setting Description RUN signal ON OFF

0 (initial value) Without earth (ground) fault detection When a value other than "9999" (initial value) or "8888" is set in Pr. 250
1 With earth (ground) fault detection*
Output is shut off when set
Output
 As detection is executed at start, output is delayed for approx. 20ms every frequency
time elapses after start
signal turned OFF
start. (Hz)
Pr. 250
 If an earth (ground) fault is detected with "1" set in Pr. 249, fault
The motor coasts to stop
output (E.GF) is displayed and the output is shut off. Time
 Protective function will not activate if an earth (ground) fault occurs Start signal ON OFF
during operation. RUN signal OFF
ON
 If the motor capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity for the 5.5K
or higher, earth (ground) fault detection may not be provided.
Pr. 251, 872
Input/output phase failure protection
selection
Pr. 251 Output phase loss protection selection Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection
You can disable the output phase failure protection function that
stops the inverter output if one of the inverter output side (load
side) three phases (U, V, W) opens. Input phase failure protection,
which stops inverter output when one of three phases (R, S, T) on
the inverter's input side is lost, can be disabled.
Pr.
Setting Range Description
Number
0 Without output phase failure protection
251
1 (initial value) With output phase failure protection
0 Without input phase failure protection
872 *
1 (initial value) With input phase failure protection

 The setting is available for three-phase power input models.

64 When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.
 Pr. 255 to 259 Pr. 261
Display of the life of the inverter parts Operation at instantaneous power

Features
Pr. 255 Life alarm status display Pr. 256 Inrush current limit circuit life display failure
Pr. 257 Control circuit capacitor life display Pr. 258 Main circuit capacitor life display
Pr. 261 Power failure stop selection
Pr. 259 Main circuit capacitor life measuring
When a power failure or undervoltage occurs, the inverter can be
Degrees of deterioration of main circuit capacitor, control circuit

Connection
example
decelerated to a stop or can be decelerated and re-accelerated to
capacitor or inrush current limit circuit and cooling fan can be
the set frequency.
diagnosed by monitor. When any part has approached the end of
its life, an alarm can be output by self diagnosis to prevent a fault. Pr. Setting
Description

Specifications
(Use the life check of this function as a guideline since the life Number Range

Standard
except the main circuit capacitor is calculated theoretically.) Coasts to stop.
0 (initial
When undervoltage or power failure occurs,
value)
Pr. Setting the inverter output is shut off.
Description
Number Range When undervoltage or a power failure occurs,
1
Displays whether the control circuit capacitor, 261 the inverter can be decelerated to a stop.

Dimension
Drawings
Outline
main circuit capacitor, cooling fan, and each When undervoltage or a power failure occurs,
255 (0 to 15) parts of the inrush current limit circuit has the inverter can be decelerated to a stop.
2
reached the life alarm output level or not. If power is restored during a power failure, the
(Reading only) inverter accelerates again.
Displays the deterioration degree of the inrush

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
256 (0 to 100%) current limit circuit.

Explanation
(1) Power failure stop function (Pr. 261 = "1")

Diagram
(Reading only)
Displays the deterioration degree of the  If power is restored during power failure deceleration,
257 (0 to 100%) control circuit capacitor. deceleration to a stop is continued and the inverter
(Reading only)

Operation panel

FR Configurator
remains stopped. To restart, turn the start signal off, then

Parameter unit
Displays the deterioration degree of the main
circuit capacitor. turn it on again.
258 (0 to 100%)
(Reading only)
The value measured by Pr. 259 is displayed. Pr. 261 = 1
Power
Setting "1" and turning the power supply off

Parameter
starts the measurement of the main circuit During deceleration
Output frequency

capacitor life. at occurrence of power failure

List
259 0, 1
When the Pr. 259 value is "3" after power-ON During stop
at occurrence
again, the measuring is completed. of power failure
Displays the deterioration degree in Pr. 258.

Explanations

Parameters
Time

STF

of
Y46 ON

Turn OFF STF once to make acceleration again

(2) Original operation continuation at instantaneous

Protective
Functions
power failure function (Pr. 261 = "2")
 When power is restored during deceleration after a power
failure, acceleration is made again up to the set frequency.

Options
Pr. 261 = 2
When power is restored during deceleration
at occurrence of power failure

IPF
Instructions
Power

Output
frequency
During deceleration at Reacceleration
occurrence of power failure Time
Y46 ON
Motor

Pr. 267 Refer to the section about Pr. 73.

Compatibility

Pr. 268 Refer to the section about Pr. 52.

Pr. 269 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.

Warranty
Inquiry

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions. 65
 Pr. 270, 275, 276, 6, 48 Pr. 278 to 283, 292
Brake sequence function AD MFVC GP MFVC
Stop-on-contact control AD MFVC GP MFVC
Pr. 278 Brake opening frequency Pr. 279 Brake opening current
Pr. 275 Stop-on contact excitation
Pr. 270 Stop-on contact control selection Pr. 280 Brake opening current detection time Pr. 281 Brake operation time at start
current low-speed multiplying factor
Pr. 282 Brake operation frequency Pr. 283 Brake operation time at stop
Pr. 276 PWM carrier frequency at stop-on contact Pr. 6 Multi-speed setting (low speed)
Pr. 292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration
Pr. 48 Second stall prevention operation current
To ensure accurate positioning at the upper limit etc. of a lift, stop- This function is used to output from the inverter the mechanical
on-contact control causes a mechanical brake to be closed while brake operation timing signal in vertical lift and other applications.
the motor is developing a holding torque to keep the load in contact This function prevents the load from dropping with gravity at a start
with a mechanical stopper etc. due to the operation timing error of the mechanical brake or an
This function suppresses vibration which is liable to occur when the overcurrent alarm from occurring at a stop, ensuring secure operation.
load is stopped upon contact in vertical motion applications,
ensuring steady precise positioning. <Operation example>
Pr. 270 Setting Description  At start: When the start signal is input to the inverter, the inverter
0 starts running. When the internal speed command reaches
Without stop-on-contact control
(initial value) the value set in Pr. 278 and the output current is not less
1 Stop-on-contact control than the value set in Pr. 279, the inverter outputs the brake
opening request signal (BOF) after the time set in Pr. 280
 Select advanced magnetic flux vector control or general-purpose
has elapsed.
magnetic flux vector control.
When the time set in Pr. 281 elapses after the brake opening
When both the RT and RL signals are switched on, the inverter
completion signal (BRI) was activated*, the inverter
enters the stop-on contact mode, in which operation is performed at
increases the output frequency to the set speed.
the frequency set in Pr. 6 Multi-speed setting (low speed)
 At stop: When the speed has decreased to the frequency set in Pr.
independently of the preceding speed.
282, the brake opening request signal (BOF) is turned off.
Output
frequency Normal mode Stop-on-contact control mode When the time set in Pr. 283 elapses after the brake
Pr. 4 operation confirmation signal (BRI) was activated*, the
inverter output is switched off.
Pr. 5 * If Pr. 292 = "8" (mechanical brake opening completion signal not input),
this time is the time after the brake opening request signal is output.
Pr. 6
0 Time
1) Pr. 292 = "7" (brake opening completion signal input)
(a) (b) (c)
Output frequency (Hz)

RH ON
RM OFF ON Target
frequency
RL OFF ON Pr. 280
Pr.13 setting
∗ Pr. 282
Pr. 281 or 0.5Hz,
RT OFF ON Pr. 278 whichever is lower
Pr. 13
∗ Goes into stop-on-contact control when both RL and RT switch ON. Time
RL and RT may be switched on in any order with any time difference. Pr. 283
ON
STF
(a) Acceleration time (Pr. 7 ) (b) Deceleration time (Pr. 8 )
Pr. 279
(c) Second deceleration time (Pr. 44/Pr. 45 )
Output current

Pr. Setting Brake opening request ON

Description (BOF signal)

Number Range Brake opening completion ON

(BRI signal)
Sets the output frequency for stop-on-contact Closed Opened Closed
Electromagnetic brake operation
control
0 to 2) Pr. 292 = "8" (brake opening completion signal not input)
6 The frequency should be as low as possible
400Hz
(about 2Hz). If it is set to more than 30Hz, the
Output frequency (Hz)

operating frequency will be 30Hz. Target

frequency
Sets the stall prevention operation level for stall Pr. 280
0 to Pr. 282
Pr. 281 Pr.13 setting
48 prevention operation level. Pr. 278 or 0.5Hz,
200% whichever is lower
(Pr. 22 when Pr. 48 = "9999") Pr. 13

Time
Usually set a value between 130% and 180%. Pr. 283
0 to STF
ON

Set the force (holding torque) for stop-on-contact

275 300%
control. Output current Pr. 279

9999 Without compensation. Brake opening request ON

(BOF signal)
Sets a PWM carrier frequency for stop-on-
0 to 9 Electromagnetic brake operation Closed Opened Closed
276 contact control.
9999 As set in Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection.

66 When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.
 Pr.
Number
Setting
Range
Description Pr. 296, 297
Set to the rated slip frequency of the motor + Password function

Features
278 0 to 30Hz about 1.0Hz.
This parameter may be set only if Pr. 278  Pr. 282. Pr. 296 Password lock level Pr. 297 Password lock/unlock
Generally, set this parameter to about 50 to Registering 4-digit password can restrict parameter reading/
90%. If the setting is too low, the load is liable
279 0 to 200% to drop due to gravity at start. writing.

Connection
Suppose that the inverter rated current is  Level of reading/writing restriction by PU/NET mode operation

example
100%.
command can be selected by Pr. 296.
Generally, set this parameter to about 0.1 to
280 0 to 2s
0.3s. PU Mode NET Mode Operation Command
Pr. 292 = 7: Set the mechanical delay time until

Specifications
Pr. 296 Operation RS-485 Communication

Standard
the brake is loosened.
281 0 to 5s Setting Communication Option
Pr. 292 = 8: Set the mechanical delay time until Command
the brake is loosened + about 0.1 to 0.2s. Read Write Read Write Read Write
At this frequency, the brake opening request 9999      
signal (BOF) is switched off. Generally, set this
282 0 to 30Hz 0, 100      
parameter to the Pr. 278 setting + 3 to 4Hz.

Dimension
Drawings
Outline
This parameter may be only set if Pr. 282  Pr. 278. 1, 101      
Pr. 292 =7: Set the mechanical delay time until 2, 102      
the brake is closed + 0.1s.
283 0 to 5s 3, 103      
Pr. 292 =8: Set the mechanical delay time until
the brake is closed + 0.2 to 0.3s. 4, 104      

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
5, 105  

Explanation
0, 1, 7, 8, Brake sequence function is made valid when a    

Diagram
292
11 setting is "7" or "8". 6, 106      
Only parameters registered in the user group can be read/written
99, 199 (For the parameters not registered in the user group, same
restriction level as "4, 104" applies.)

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Pr. 286, 287

Parameter unit
: enabled, : restricted

Droop control AD MFVC Pr. Setting

Description
Number Range
Pr. 286 Droop gain Pr. 287 Droop filter time constant
1000 to 9998 Register a 4-digit password

Parameter
This function is designed to balance the load in proportion to the
Displays password unlock error count.

List
load torque to provide the speed drooping characteristic. (0 to 5)  (Reading only)
297 
This function is effective for balancing the load when using (Valid when Pr. 296 = "100" to "106")
multiple inverters 9999

Explanations

Parameters
No password lock
(initial value)
Pr. Setting

of
Description  If the password has been forgotten, perform all parameter clear to
Number Range unlock the parameter restriction. In that case, other parameters are also
0 cleared.
Droop control is invalid  "0 or 9999" can be entered in Pr. 297, but the Pr. 297 setting is not
(initial value)
overwritten.

Protective
Functions
286 Set the drooping amount at the rated torque
0.1 to 100% as a percentage with respect to the rated
motor frequency.
0.00 to Set the time constant of the filter applied on
Pr. 298 Refer to the section about Pr. 82.
287
1.00s the torque amount current.
Pr. 299 Refer to the section about Pr. 57.

Options
 Droop control
This control is valid when a value other than "0" is set in Pr. 286
under advanced magnetic flux vector control.
The maximum droop compensation frequency is 120Hz.
Instructions

Frequency command

Droop compensation
Rated frequency

frequency
Droop
gain
Motor

-100% 0 100% Torque

Compatibility

Pr. 292, 293 Refer to the section about Pr. 61.

Pr. 295 Refer to the section about Pr. 161.

Warranty
Inquiry

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions. 67
 Pr. 338, 339, 550, 551 Pr. 495 to 497
Start command source and frequency Remote output function (REM signal)
command source during communication Pr. 495 Remote output selection Pr. 496 Remote output data 1
Pr. 497 Remote output data 2
operation
You can utilize the on/off of the inverter's output signals instead of
Pr. 338 Communication operation command source Pr. 339 Communication speed command source
Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection Pr. 551 PU mode operation command source selection the remote output terminal of the programmable controller.
Pr. Setting
When the RS-485 communication with the PU connector or Description
Number Range
communication option is used, the external start command and
0 Remote output data
frequency command can be made valid. Command source in the (initial value) clear at powering off Remote output data
PU operation mode can be selected. is cleared during an
Remote output data inverter reset
1
held at powering off
Pr. Setting 495
Description Remote output data
Number Range 10 Remote output data
clear at powering off
0 is retained during an
(initial Start command source communication Remote output data inverter reset
11
338 value) held at powering off
1 Start command source external 496 0 to 4095
Refer to the following diagram.
0 497 0 to 4095
(initial Frequency command source communication  The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in
value) any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write
1 Frequency command source external selection.
339
Frequency command source external ($$When <Remote output data>
there is no external input, the frequency
2
command via communication is valid, and the Pr. 496
frequency command from terminal 2 is invalid.)
b11 b0
The communication option is the command
0
source in the NET operation mode.

ABC 

FU 

RUN

















PU connector is the command source in the
2
NET operation mode.
550
Automatic communication option recognition
9999
Normally, PU connector is valid. When a Pr. 497
(initial
communication option is mounted, the
value) b11 b0
communication option is valid.
PU connector is the command source in the PU
RA3 

RA2 

RA1 

2
Y6 

Y5 

Y4 

Y3 

Y2 

Y1 

Y0 
operation mode.




USB connector is the command source in the

3
PU operation mode.
 Optional (always 0 when read)
Operation panel is the command source in the
4
PU operation mode.  Y0 to Y6 are available only when the extension output option (FR-
551 A7AY E kit) is fitted
USB automatic recognition  RA1 to RA3 are available only when the relay output option (FR-A7AR
Normally, operation panel is the command E kit) is fitted
9999
source. When the PU (FR-PU07) is connected  Optional for the CC-Link communication model (always "0" when read)
(initial
to the PU connector, PU is the command
value)
source. When USB is connected, USB is the
command source.
 This parameter allows its setting to be changed in any operation mode Pr. 502 Refer to the section about Pr. 117.
even if "0 (initial value) or 1" is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.

Pr. 340 Refer to the section about Pr. 79. Pr. 503, 504
Pr. 342, 343 Refer to the section about Pr. 117. Maintenance of parts
Pr. 450 Refer to the section about Pr. 71. Pr. 503 Maintenance timer Pr. 504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time
When the cumulative energization time of the inverter reaches the
parameter set time, the maintenance timer output signal (Y95) is
output. (MT) is displayed on the operation panel.
This can be used as a guideline for the maintenance time of
peripheral devices.
First power
ON

9998
(999800h)
Set "0" in Pr. 503
Maintenance
timer
(Pr. 503) Pr. 504

Time
Y95 signal OFF ON ON
MT display

 The cumulative energization time of the inverter is stored into the

EEPROM every hour and indicated in Pr. 503 Maintenance timer in
100h increments. Pr. 503 is clamped at 9998 (999800h).

68 When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.
 Pr. 547, 548 Pr. 665, 882, 883, 885, 886
Inverter setup using USB communication Regeneration avoidance function

Features
Pr. 547 USB communication station number Pr. 548 USB communication check time interval Pr. 665 Regeneration avoidance frequency gain Pr. 882 Regeneration avoidance operation selection
Pr. 885 Regeneration avoidance
Inverter setup with setup software (FR Configurator) can be easily Pr. 883 Regeneration avoidance operation level
compensation frequency limit value
performed by USB communication. Pr. 886 Regeneration avoidance voltage gain
(FR Configurator supports the standard control circuit terminal

Connection
example
model only.) This function detects a regeneration status and increases the
Pr. Setting frequency to avoid the regenerative status.
Description
Number Range  Possible to avoid regeneration by automatically increasing the
0 frequency and continue operation if the fan happens to rotate faster

Specifications
(initial value) Set the station number of USB device
547

Standard
(inverter) within the range "0 to 31". than the set speed due to the effect of another fan in the same duct.
1 to 31
Set the communication check time interval of Pr. Setting
USB communication. Description
0 to 999.8 If data is not received within the time set in Number Range
548 0 (initial

Dimension
Pr. 548, (E.USB) is displayed. Regeneration avoidance function invalid

Drawings
value)

Outline
9999 882 1 Regeneration avoidance function is always valid
Communication time interval is not checked.
(initial value)
Regeneration avoidance function is valid only
2
during a constant speed operation
Pr. 549 Refer to the section about Pr. 117. Set the bus voltage level at which regeneration

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
avoidance operates. When the bus voltage level
Pr. 550, 551

Explanation
Diagram
Refer to the section about Pr. 338. 300 to is set to low, overvoltage error will be less apt to
883 occur. However, the actual deceleration time
800V
increases. The set value must be higher than
Pr. 555 to 557 the "power supply voltage  2 " *.

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
Set the limit value of frequency which rises at
Current average value monitor signal 885
0 to 10Hz
activation of regeneration avoidance function.
Pr. 555 Current average time Pr. 556 Data output mask time 9999 Frequency limit invalid
Pr. 557 Current average value monitor signal Adjusts responsiveness at activation of
output reference current 886 regeneration avoidance. A larger setting will

Parameter
improve responsiveness to the bus voltage
The average value of the output current during constant speed 0 to change. However, the output frequency could

List
operation and the maintenance timer value are output as a pulse 200% become unstable. When the load inertia of the
to the current average value monitor signal (Y93). 665 motor is large, decrease the Pr. 886 setting.
The pulse width output to the I/O module of the programmable When vibration is not suppressed by decreasing
controller or the like can be used as a guideline due to abrasion of the Pr. 886 setting, set a smaller value in Pr. 665.

Explanations

Parameters
machines and elongation of belt and for aged deterioration of  For single-phase 100V power input model, "power input voltage  2 

of
devices to know the maintenance time.
The current average value monitor signal (Y93) is output as pulse 2 ".
for 20s as 1 cycle and repeatedly output during constant speed Regeneration avoidance
operation example for deceleration
operation.

Protective
frequency Bus voltage

Functions
Pr. 883
(VDC)

From acceleration to constant speed operation

Output frequency Time

Output

(Hz)

Time

Options
During regeneration Time
1 cycle (20s) Next cycle avoidance function operation

Y93 signal

1) Data output mask time

When the speed has changed to
constant from acceleration/deceleration,
5) End pulse
Output as low pulse
Pr. 800 Refer to the section about Pr. 80.
shape for 1 to 16.5s

Pr. 859
Y93 signal is not output for Pr. 556 time.
Instructions

2) Start pulse 4) Maintenance timer pulse

The maintenance timer value (Pr. 503) is
Refer to the section about Pr. 82.
Output as Hi pulse shape for 1s (fixed)
The output currents are averaged during output as Hi pulse shape for 2 to 9s
the time period set in Pr. 555.

3) Output current average value pulse

(16000h to 72000h)
Signal output time =
Pr. 503 100h
40000h
5s Pr. 872 Refer to the section about Pr. 251.
The averaged current value is output for 0.5 to 9s
(10 to 180%) during start pulse output.
Output current average value (A)
Signal output time = 5s
Pr. 557 (A)

Pr. 888, 889

Motor

Pr. 563, 564 Refer to the section about Pr. 52.

Free parameter
Pr. 571 Refer to the section about Pr. 13. Pr. 889 Free parameter 1 Pr. 889 Free parameter 2
Compatibility

Pr. 611 Refer to the section about Pr. 57.

Parameters you can use for your own purposes.
You can input any number within the setting range 0 to 9999.
For example, the number can be used:
Pr. 653  As a unit number when multiple units are used.
Warranty

Reduce mechanical resonance  As a pattern number for each operation application when
Pr. 653 Speed smoothing control
multiple units are used.
 As the year and month of introduction or inspection.
Mechanical vibration produced while motor is driving (resonance)
can be reduced. Set 100% in Pr. 653 and check if the vibration will
be reduced. Make adjustment gradually increasing the setting,
Inquiry

until the vibration become the smallest.

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions. 69
 Pr. C0(900) Pr. 990
Adjustment of terminal FM output Buzzer control of the operation panel
(calibration) Pr. 990 PU buzzer control

C0 (Pr. 900)FM terminal calibration You can make the buzzer "beep" when you press key of the
By using the operation panel or PU (FR-PU07), you can calibrate operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
terminal FM to full scale deflection. Pr. 990 Setting Description
FM terminal calibration (C0 (Pr. 900)) 0 Without buzzer
 The terminal FM is preset to output pulses. By setting the 1
With buzzer
calibration parameter C0 (Pr. 900), the meter connected to the (initial value)
inverter can be calibrated by parameter setting without use of a
calibration resistor.
 Using the pulse train output of the terminal FM, a digital display
can be provided by a digital counter. The monitor value is 1440
Pr. 991
pulses/s output at the full-scale value of Pr. 54 FM terminal function PU contrast adjustment
selection. Pr. 991 PU contrast adjustment
Indicator
1mA full-scale
Contrast adjustment of the LCD of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/
(Digital indicator)
1mA
analog meter
1440 pulses/s(+) (-) FR-PU07) can be performed.
FM FM
Decreasing the setting value makes contrast light.
(+) (-) T1
Calibration
resistor *1
8VDC
SD SD
T2 Pr. 991 Setting Description
Pulse width T1: Adjust using calibration parameter C0
Pulse cycle T2: Set with Pr. 55 (frequency monitor) 0: Light
Set with Pr. 56 (current monitor)
0 to 63 
 Not needed when the operation panel or PU (FR-PU07) is used for
calibration. 63: Dark
Use a calibration resistor when the indicator (frequency meter) needs to
be calibrated by a neighboring device because the indicator is located far
from the inverter.
However, the frequency meter needle may not deflect to full-scale if the
calibration resistor is connected. In this case, use this resistor and
Pr. CL, ALLC, Er.CL, CH
operation panel or PU (FR-PU07) together. Clear parameter, initial value change list
Pr. C2(902) to C7(905), C22(922) to C25(923) Pr.CL Parameter clear
Er.CL Fault history clear
ALLC All parameter clear
Pr.CH Initial value change list
Refer to the section about Pr. 125.  Set "1" in Pr.CL parameter clear to initialize all parameters.
(Calibration parameters are not cleared.)
 Set "1" in ALLC All parameter clear to initialize all parameters.
 Set "1" in Er.CL Fault history clear to clear fault history.
 Using Pr.CH Initial value change list, only the parameters changed
from the initial value can be displayed.
 Parameters are not cleared when "1" is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write
selection.

To perform energy-saving operation for an application such as a fan or pump

To perform energy-saving operation for an application such as a fan or pump, set the parameters as follows.

(1) Load pattern selection (Pr. 14) V/F (2) Energy saving control (Pr. 60) V/F
Optimal output characteristics (V/F characteristics) can be Inverter will perform energy saving control automatically even
selected for application or load characteristics. when the detailed parameter settings are made.
 Set "1" (for variable-torque load) in Pr. It is appropriate for an application such as a fan or pump.
Pr. 14 = 1
14 Load pattern selection.  Set Pr. 60 Energy saving control
 The output voltage will change in 100% selection = "9" (Optimum excitation 100 Optimum excitation control
Output voltage

square curve against the output control mode).

frequency at the base frequency or  The Optimum excitation control is 80
Motor efficiency (%)

lower. a control method to decide the More energy saving

60
Set this parameter when driving a load output voltage by controlling the
Pr. 3 Base frequency
with load torque change proportionally Output frequency (Hz) excitation current so the efficiency 40

against the square of the rotation V/F control

of the motor is maximized.
speed, such as a fan or pump.  The energy saving effect cannot 20

be expected when the motor

capacity is extremely smaller than 0 20 40 60 80 100
Motor load torque (%)
the inverter capacity, or when [Comparison of Mitsubishi Electric products]

multiple motors are connected to

one inverter.

70 When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.
Protective Functions

When a fault occurs, the inverter output is shut off and the PU display automatically changes to any of the following fault or alarm indications.
Function Name Description Display
Operation panel lock Appears when operation was tried during operation panel lock.
Error message

Features
Password locked Password function is active. Display and setting of parameter is restricted.


to
Parameter write error Appears when an error occurred during parameter writing.

Inverter reset Appears when the RES signal is on.

Connection
Stall prevention (overcurrent) Appears during overcurrent stall prevention.

example
Stall prevention (overvoltage) Appears during overvoltage stall prevention. Appears while the regeneration avoidance function is activated.
Appears if the regenerative brake duty reaches or exceeds 85% of the Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty
Regenerative brake pre-alarm
value. If the regenerative brake duty reaches 100%, a regenerative overvoltage (E. OV_) occurs.
Electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm Appears when the electronic thermal O/L relay has reached 85% of the specified value.
Warnings

Specifications
Standard


PU stop Appears when on the operation panel was pressed during external operation.
Maintenance signal output Appears when the cumulative energization time has exceeded the maintenance output timer set value.
Undervoltage Appears when the main circuit power became low voltage.
Safety stop  Appears when safety stop function is activated (during output shutoff).

Dimension
Drawings
Outline
24V external power supply operation  Blinks when the main circuit power is not supplied and the 24V external power is being input.
Alarms

Appears when the cooling fan remains stopped when operation is required or when the speed has
Fan alarm


decreased.

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
Overcurrent trip during acceleration Appears when an overcurrent occurred during acceleration.

Explanation
Diagram
Overcurrent trip during constant speed Appears when an overcurrent occurred during constant speed operation.
Overcurrent trip during deceleration or stop Appears when an overcurrent occurred during deceleration and at a stop.
Regenerative overvoltage trip during
Appears when an overvoltage occurred during acceleration.
acceleration

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
Regenerative overvoltage trip during
Appears when an overvoltage occurred during constant speed operation.
constant speed
Regenerative overvoltage trip during
Appears when an overvoltage occurred during deceleration and at a stop.
deceleration or stop
Inverter overload trip
Appears when the electronic thermal relay function for inverter element protection was activated.
(electronic thermal O/L relay function)

Parameter
Motor overload trip
Appears when the electronic thermal relay function for motor protection was activated.

List
(electronic thermal O/L relay function) 
Heatsink overheat Appears when the heatsink overheated.
Input phase loss May appear when one phase voltage is lost or differs greatly from others in three-phases power supply.

Explanations
Stall prevention stop Appears when the output frequency drops to 1Hz as a result of deceleration due to the excess motor load.

Parameters
This function stops the inverter output if an alarm occurs in the brake circuit, e.g. damaged brake
Brake transistor alarm detection

of
transistors. In this case, the inverter must be powered off immediately.
Output side earth (ground) fault
Appears when an earth (ground) fault occurred on the inverter's output side. (detects only at a start)
overcurrent at start
If one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side (load side) is lost during inverter operation
Output phase loss

Protective
Functions
(except during DC injection brake operation and when output frequency is under 1Hz), inverter stops the output.
External thermal relay operation Appears when the external thermal relay connected to the OH signal was activated.
Fault


Option fault Appears when communication option is connected during password lock (Pr. 296 Password lock level = "0, 100").
Communication option fault Appears when a communication error occurred in the communication option.
Option fault Appears when a contact fault or the like of the connector between the inverter and communication option occurs.

Options
Parameter storage device fault Appears when operation of the element where parameters stored became abnormal. (control board)
Internal board fault When a combination of control board and main circuit board is wrong, the inverter is tripped.
Appears when a communication error between the PU and inverter occurred, the communication
PU disconnection  interval exceeded the permissible time during the RS-485 communication with the PU connector, or
Instructions

communication errors exceeded the number of retries during the RS-485 communication.
Retry count excess Appears when the operation was not restarted within the set number of retries.
/
CPU fault Appears during the CPU and peripheral circuit errors occurred. /
/
Motor

Inrush current limit circuit fault Appears when the resistor of the inrush current limit circuit overheated.
Appears if voltage (current) is input to terminal 4 when the setting in Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection
Analog input fault 
and the setting of voltage/current input switch are different.
Compatibility

The inverter output is stopped when a sequence error occurs during use of the brake sequence to
Brake sequence error
function (Pr. 278 to Pr. 285).
USB communication fault  Appears when USB communication error occurred.
Safety circuit fault  Stop the inverter output when an internal circuit fault occurred.
Internal circuit fault Appears when an internal circuit error occurred.
Warranty

 Resetting the inverter initializes the internal thermal integrated data of the  Available for only three-phase power input models.
electronic thermal relay function. This protective function does not function for the standard control circuit
 The error message shows an operational error. The inverter output is not shut off. terminal model or the built-in Ethernet communication function model.
 Warnings are messages given before fault occur. The inverter output is not shut off. This protective function is available for the safety stop function model (with the FR-
 Alarms warn the operator of failures with output signals. The inverter output E7DS), FL remote communication model, and CC-Link communication model.
is not shut off. This protective function does not function for the FL remote communication
Inquiry

 When faults occur, the protective functions are activated to inverter trip and model, the CC-Link communication model, and the dedicated EtherCAT
output the fault signals. communication model.
 The external thermal operates only when the OH signal is set in Pr. 178 to Pr. This protective function does not function for the FL remote communication
184 (input terminal function selection). model and the dedicated EtherCAT communication model.
 This protective function does not function in the initial status. This protective function does not function for the FL remote communication model.
 Protective function activates when Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection = "1".

71
 Option and Peripheral Devices

Option list
By fitting the following options to the inverter, the inverter is provided with more functions.
One type of plug-in option can be mounted.
Applicable
Name Model Applications, Specifications, etc.
Inverter
Standard control
FR-A7AX E kit  This input interface sets the high frequency accuracy of the inverter using an external BCD circuit terminal
or binary digital signal. model
16-bit digital input FR-A7A E kit  BCD code 3 digits (maximum 999)  BCD code 4 digits (maximum 9999)
Safety stop
cover SC and  Binary 12 bits (maximum FFFH)  Binary 16 bits (maximum FFFFH)
function model
FR-A7AX *2
Standard control
FR-A7AY E kit  This option provides the inverter with open collector outputs selected from among the circuit terminal
standard output signals. model
Digital output
FR-A7A E kit  This option adds two different signals that can be monitored at the terminals AM0 and AM1, such
Extension analog output as the output frequency, output voltage and output current. Safety stop
cover SC and  20mADC or 10VDC meter can be connected. function model
FR-A7AY *2
Standard control
FR-A7AR E kit circuit terminal
 This option provides the inverter with three different relay contact outputs selected from model
Relay output FR-A7A E kit among the standard output signals.
Safety stop
cover SC and function model
FR-A7AR 
 Connecting a 24V external power supply allows maintaining the I/O terminal function and
Safety stop
24VDC input FR-E7DS the operation panel function (indication and key operation) even at power-OFF of inverter's
function model
main circuit power supply.
Standard control
Plug-in type

FR-A7NC E kit circuit terminal

model
CC-Link communication FR-A7NC E kit
Safety stop
cover SC and function model
FR-A7NC
Standard control
FR-A7NL E kit circuit terminal
model
LONWORKS communication FR-A7NL E kit
Safety stop
cover SC and function model
Communication

FR-A7NL
Standard control
FR-A7ND E kit  This option allows the inverter to be operated or monitored or the parameter setting to be circuit terminal
changed from programmable controller, etc. model
DeviceNet communication FR-A7ND E kit
Safety stop
cover SC and function model
FR-A7ND
Standard control
FR-A7NP E kit circuit terminal
model
PROFIBUS-DP communication FR-A7NP E kit
Safety stop
cover SC and function model
FR-A7NP
Dedicated
EtherCAT
EtherCAT communication E7NECT_2P communication
model
Standard control
terminal

circuit terminal
Control

Multi-drop connection is easy with the 2 port terminal block adapted for EIA-485 (RS-485) model
RS-485 2-port terminal block FR-E7TR communication terminal. Ethernet
communication
function model

72
 Applicable
Name Model Applications, Specifications, etc.
Inverter
Parameter unit (8 languages) FR-PU07 Interactive parameter unit with LCD display
This parameter unit enables parameter setting without connecting the inverter to power Standard control
Parameter unit with battery pack FR-PU07BB

Features
supply. circuit terminal
This operation panel enables inverter operation and monitoring of frequency, etc. from the model
Enclosure surface operation panel FR-PA07 enclosure surface Safety stop
Cable for connection of operation panel or parameter unit function model
Parameter unit connection cable FR-CB20  indicates a cable length. (1m, 3m, 5m) Ethernet
Connector for amplifier Connector for personal computer communication

Connection
MR-J3USBCBL3M

example
USB cable mini-B connector (5 pin) A connector function model
Cable length 3m
3.7K or lower. The
option's model
For installation of a FR-E700 series inverter to the installation holes of FR-A024/A044 series
Intercompatibility attachment FR-E7AT01 to 03 inverter. varies with the

Specifications
inverter's model.

Standard
3.7K or lower. The
option's model
DIN rail attachment FR-UDA01 to 03 Attachment for installation on DIN rail varies with the
inverter's model.
All capacities. The
FR-E7CN01 to Using this attachment dissipates about 70% of the inverter's heat by having the inverter option's model
Panel through attachment
06 heatsink protrude from the back side of the enclosure. varies with the

Dimension
Drawings
Outline
inverter's model.
7.5K or lower of the
200V class of the
Totally enclosed structure standard control
FR-E7CV01 to Installing the attachment to the inverter changes the protective structure of the inverter to the circuit terminal
specification attachment
04 totally enclosed structure (IP40 equivalent as specified by JEM1030). model. The option's

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
for the FR-E700 series model varies with

Explanation
Diagram
the inverter's
model.
AC reactor FR-HAL All capacities. The
option's model
For harmonic current reduction and inverter input power factor improvement
DC reactor FR-HEL varies with the

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
inverter's model.
All capacities. The
SF, FR-E5NF, option's model
Stand-alone shared

EMC Directive compliant noise filter EMC Directive (EN61800-3 C3) compliant noise filter
FR-S5NFSA varies with the
inverter's model.
11K of the 200V
FR-A5AT03 class

Parameter
15K of the 200V
class, and 11K and

List
FR-AAT02 15K of the 400V
EMC compliant EMC filter
For installation of the inverter to the EMC Directive compliant EMC filter (SF). class
installation attachment 2.2K to 7.5K of the
200V class. The

Explanations
FR-E5T(-02) option's model

Parameters
varies with the
inverter's model.

of
Radio noise filter FR-BIF(H) For radio noise reduction (connect to the input side)
FR- BSF01, All capacities.
Line noise filter For line noise reduction
FR- BLF
0.4K or higher of

Protective
Functions
the three-phase
Combination of power factor improving DC reactor, common mode choke, and capacitative power input model.
Filterpack FR-BFP2 filter The option's model
varies with the
inverter's model.
Brake resistor MRS type, MYS type For increasing the regenerative braking capability (permissible duty 3%ED) 0.4K or higher. The
High-duty brake resistor FR-ABR For increasing the regenerative braking capability (permissible duty 10%/6%ED) option's model

Options
Brake unit, Resistor unit, FR-BU2, FR-BR, For increasing the braking capability of the inverter (for high-inertia load or negative load) varies with the
Discharging resistor GZG, GRZG type Brake unit, electrical-discharge resistor and resistor unit are used in combination inverter's model.
Power regeneration common converter FR-CV Unit which can return motor-generated braking energy back to the power supply in common All capacities of the
Stand-alone reactor dedicated for the FR-CV FR-CVL converter system standard control
circuit terminal
Instructions

model and safety

The high power factor converter switches the converter section on/off to reshape an input stop function
High power factor converter FR-HC2 current waveform into a sine wave, greatly suppressing harmonics. (Used in combination with model. The option's
the standard accessory.) model varies with
the inverter's
model.
All capacities of the
400V class. The
Motor

FR-ASF option's model

varies with the
inverter's model.
Surge voltage suppression filter Filter for suppressing surge voltage on motor
5.5K or higher of
the 400V class.
Compatibility

FR-BMF The option's model

varies with the
inverter's model.
Warranty
Inquiry

73
 Applicable
Name Model Applications, Specifications, etc.
Inverter
Manual controller FR-AX For independent operation. With frequency meter, frequency potentiometer and start switch.
controller/speed controller

DC tach. follower FR-AL For synchronous operation (1VA) by external signal (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V DC)
Three speed selector FR-AT For three speed switching, among high, middle and low speed operation (1.5VA)
FR series manual

Motorized speed setter FR-FK For remote operation. Allows operation to be controlled from several places (5VA)
Ratio setter FR-FH For ratio operation. The ratios of five inverters can be set (3VA)
Speed detector FR-FP For tracking operation by a pilot generator (PG) signal (2VA)
Master controller FR-FG Master controller (5VA) for parallel operation of multiple (maximum 35) inverters.
Soft starter FR-FC For soft start and stop. Enables acceleration/deceleration in parallel operation (3VA)
For continuous speed control operation. Used in combination with a deviation sensor or All capacities.
Deviation detector FR-FD synchro (5VA)
Preamplifier FR-FA Used as an A/V converter or arithmetic amplifier (3VA)
Pilot generator QVAH-10 For tracking operation. 70V/35VAC 500Hz (at 2500r/min)
Deviation sensor YVGC-500W-NS For continuous speed control operation (mechanical deviation detection) Output 90VAC/90ºC
Frequency setting potentiometer WA2W 1k For frequency setting. Wire-wound 2W 1k type B characteristic
Analog frequency meter
YM206NRI 1mA Dedicated frequency meter (graduated to 130Hz). Moving-coil type DC ammeter
(64mm  60mm)
Calibration resistor RV24YN 10k For frequency meter calibration. Carbon film type B characteristic
Others

Standard control
circuit terminal
model, safety stop
FR Configurator SW3 (VFD setup FR-SW3-
Supports an inverter startup to maintenance. function model,
software) SETUP-WE CC-Link
communication
model
Ethernet
FR Configurator2 (Inverter setup
SW1DND-FRC2 Supports an inverter startup to maintenance. communication
software) function model
 The connectable inverter models or applicable capacities differ for each option. (To check the inverter lineup, refer to page 8.)
 Prepare both the dedicated E kit cover and the plug-in option unit.
 Manufactured by HMS Industrial Networks AB
 Rated power consumption. The power supply specifications of the FR series manual controllers and speed controllers are 200VAC 50Hz, 220V/220VAC 60Hz, and 115VAC 60Hz.

74
 Control terminal option

Features
Name (Model) Specifications, Structure, etc.
 Use the option in exchange with standard control circuit terminals. (This option cannot be used  When using terminals PC-SD as a
simultaneously with the operation panel (FR-PA07) or parameter unit (FR-PU07).) 24VDC power supply, take care not
 Terminal connection diagram to short across terminals PC-SD.
 Terminal input specifications can be

Connection
Control input signals (No voltage input allowed) STF C Relay output

example
Forward rotation start
Terminal functions
Terminal functions vary by changed by analog input
vary with the input STR B
Reverse rotation start Relay output Pr. 192 A,B,C terminal specifications switchover (Pr. 73).
terminal assignment
(Alarm output) function selection
(Pr. 178 to Pr. 184)
High speed
RH A  Terminal input specifications can be
RM changed by analog input
Multi-speed Middle speed RUN Open collector output
specifications switchover (Pr. 267).

Specifications
selection Running Terminal functions vary with the
RL
Set the voltage/current input switch

Standard
Low speed output terminal assignment (Pr.
MRS FU 190, Pr. 191)
Output stop
in the "V" position to select voltage
Frequency detection
input (0 to 5V/0 to10V) and "I" (initial

SOURCE
RES
Reset Open collector output common
SE value) to select current input (4 to

SINK
SD Sink/source common
Contact input common 24V Calibration Indicator (Frequency meter, etc.) 20mA).
24VDC power supply
(Common for external power supply transistor) PC *1 resistor + - Moving-coil type  It is recommended to use 2W1k

Dimension
Drawings
FM 1mA full-scale when the frequency setting signal is

Outline
Frequency setting signals (Analog) 3 10(+5V) Terminal *5
2/SG switch SD changed frequently.
Frequency setting 2
potentiometer 2 0 to 5VDC *2 *6  It is not necessary when calibrating
1/2W1kΩ (0 to 10VDC) O SDA
*4
N
SDA
EIA-485 (RS-485) the indicator from the operation
communication signal
1 SG SDB panel.
(Analog common) SDB
 Set the switch to the right (ON)

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
From the computer
RDA
Terminal 4 input (+) 4 4 to 20mADC or previous inverter
position to pass a shielded wire

Explanation
(Current input) (-) RDA

Diagram
0 to 5VDC *3
RDB
0 to 10VDC
RDB
across terminal SG.
I V  Set only the terminating resistor
Voltage/current
OPEN 100Ω To the next inverter switch of the remotest inverter to the
input switch *3 Terminating
resistor switch *7 "100" position.

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
 Communication  Terminal layout
Item Description
OPEN
Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link
Communication protocol
communication), MODBUS RTU protocol

Parameter
Conforming standard EIA-485 (RS-485) 100
10 4

List
I

Number of connectable
RS-485 2port 32 units maximum
V

devices
terminal block Communication speed 4800/9600/19200/38400bps
SDA SDB RDA RDB SG 2
FR-E7TR Communication method Half-duplex system

Explanations
SOURCE

Parameters
100 (valid/invalid can be changed with a

SINK
Terminating resistor

of
terminating resistor switch)
SDA SDB RDA RDB RUN FU SE

Protective
Functions
FM RL RM RH MRS RES SD PC STF STR SD SD

A B C

 Control terminal specifications

Options
Terminal Symbol Terminal Name Description
SDA (2 points) Inverter send+ Sending signal output terminal from the inverter.
RS-485 communication

SDB (2 points) Inverter send- Inverse sending signal output terminal from the inverter.
Receive signal input terminal of the inverter.
Instructions

RDA (2 points) Inverter receive+ Changing the terminating resistor switch to "100" side connects the inverter to the 100
terminating resistor.
Receive signal input terminal of the inverter.
RDB (2 points) Inverter receive- Changing the terminating resistor switch to "100" side connects the inverter to the 100
terminating resistor.
Used as power supply when connecting potentiometer for frequency setting (speed setting)
Motor

10 Frequency setting power supply from outside of the inverter. (Specifications are the same as the standard control circuit
terminal)
Inputting 0 to 5VDC (or 0 to 10V) provides the maximum output frequency at 5V (10V) and
Frequency setting

makes input and output proportional. (Specifications are the same as the standard control
Compatibility

circuit terminal)
Frequency setting (voltage)/
2
Common terminal
Set terminal 2/SG switch to the right position (ON) to change terminal 2 to terminal SG to
pass a shielded wire across terminal SG during RS-485 communication. In this case,
voltage at terminal 2 is 0V input.
Warranty

Inputting 4 to 20mADC (or 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V) provides the maximum output frequency at
4 Frequency setting (current) 20mA and makes input and output proportional. (Specifications are the same as the standard
control circuit terminal)
RS-485 communication common, Common terminal of RS-485 communication and frequency setting signal (terminal 2 or
SG
Analog common terminal 4). Do not earth (ground).
Inquiry

 Specifications of contact input (STF, STR, RH, RM, RL, MRS, RES, SD, PC) and output signal (A. B, C, RUN, FU, SE, FM) are the same as the
standard control circuit terminal.

75
 Stand-alone option

Name (Model) Specifications, Structure, etc.

 FR-A024/A044 series intercompatibility attachment
The FR-E700 series inverter can be installed using installation holes of the conventional FR-
A024/A044 series with this attachment. This attachment is useful for replacing the Inverter
FR-E7AT
conventional model with the FR-E700 series.
(The depth increases after installation of the inverter when the attachment is used.)

12
Intercompatibility Mountable Models Compatible Former Models
Attachment Model E720 E740 A024 A044
attachment 0.1K 0.1K
FR-E7AT FR-E7AT01
0.2K
—
0.2K
—
0.4K 0.4K
0.75K 0.75K
FR-E7AT02 1.5K — 1.5K —
— 1.5K — 1.5K
FR-E7AT03 2.2K 2.2K 2.2K 2.2K
3.7K 3.7K 3.7K 3.7K
 Attachment to enable installation of FR-E700 series on DIN rail.
 Selection table
Inverter Capacity
Attachment Model
E720 E720S E710W
FR-UDA01 0.1K, 0.2K, 0.4K, 0.75K 0.1K,0.2K,0.4K 0.1K,0.2K,0.4K
FR-UDA02 1.5K,2.2K 0.75K,1.5K 0.75K
FR-UDA03 3.7K — —

 Approximate dimension
<FR-UDA01> <FR-UDA02> <FR-UDA03>

DIN rail mounting 68 108 170

67 67
attachments 67
15 15 14.4
10
FR-UDA
128

128

128
8.7
8.7

8.7
Hook 3-M4 0.7 screw Hook 4-M4 0.7 screw Hook 4-M4 0.7 screw (Unit: mm)
 Using this attachment dissipates about 70% of the inverter's heat by having the inverter heatsink protrude from the back side of the
enclosure.
 Selection table
Inverter Capacity
Attachment Model
E720 E740 E720S
FR-E7CN01 1.5K, 2.2K — 0.75K, 1.5K
FR-E7CN02 3.7K — —
FR-E7CN03 5.5K, 7.5K — —
FR-E7CN04 — 1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K 2.2K
FR-E7CN05 — 5.5K, 7.5K —
FR-E7CN06 11K, 15K 11K, 15K —

● Installation drawing
Panel through When this attachment is used, a larger installation area is required for the inverter.
FR-E7CN
attachment
Enclosure
FR-E7CN

Heatsink

FR-E7CN
Cooling wind

76
 Name (Model) Specifications, Structure, etc.
 IInstalling the attachment to the inverter changes the protective structure of the inverter to the totally enclosed structure (IP40 equivalent as specified
by JEM1030).
 Selection table

Features
Attachment Model Applicable inverter model
FR-E7CV01 FR-E720-0.1K to 0.75K  Plug-in options cannot be used when the attachment is installed for total
enclosure.
FR-E7CV02 FR-E720-1.5K, 2.2K
 A USB connector cannot be used when any of the FR-E7CV02 to 04 is
FR-E7CV03 FR-E720-3.7K
installed.
FR-E7CV04 FR-E720-5.5K, 7.5K  To meet the requirement of the totally enclosed structure specification, do

Connection
example
not use the inverter with the PU connector cover open.

 Outline dimension (Unit: mm)

<FR-E7CV01> <FR-E7CV02>

Specifications
2-φ5 hole Rating plate 2-φ5 hole Rating plate

Standard
5.8
5

Screw: M4 Screw: M4

127.3
126.5

118
118

Dimension
Drawings
164.3

Outline
170
177.7
172

30

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
44.7

Explanation
Diagram
5 5

(5.7)
5 4
96 (2.4) 130.3
(5.7)

(2.4) D
56 35.1 50 (25.1) 136.3
14.8 40 (14.8)
69.6 110.2
17.1 30 17 17 (29.1)

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
19.8 30 (19.8)
4-φ22
Totally enclosed 4-φ22

structure

25
specification
30

20
attachment Inverter model D D1
18

Parameter
FR-E720-0.1K, 0.2K 80.5 10
FR-E7CV for the

List
65
FR-E720-0.4K 112.5 42
D1

FR-E700 series FR-E720-0.75K 132.5 62

Explanations

Parameters
<FR-E7CV03> <FR-E7CV04>

of
2-φ5 hole 2-φ6 hole
Rating plate
5.8

8.8

Screw: M4 Screw: M5

Protective
Functions
118
127.3

164.3
170

258.8

244
280.8
286.5
30

Options
5 5
(5.7)

158 (2.4) 137.3

71 70 (31.2) 143.3
46.5

172.2 Rating plate

6 10
60.1 30 30 7 (45 .1)
(5.7)

164 (3.2) 159

Instructions

4-φ22 77.1 28 (77.1) 166

182.2
φ22
43.1 38 29 29 (43.1) 3-φ28
30

18.5
19.2

44.5
72

Motor
78.5

Compatibility
Warranty
Inquiry

77
 Name (Model) Specifications, Structure, etc.
 Outline dimension
(Unit: mm)
Mass Mass
Less than D
Inverter Model W D H (kg) Inverter Model W D H (kg)
AC reactor 0.4K 104 72 99 0.6 H0.4K 135 59.6 115 1.5
0.75K 104 74 99 0.8 H0.75K 135 59.6 115 1.5
(for power
1.5K 104 77 99 1.1 H1.5K 135 59.6 115 1.5
coordination) 2.2K 115 77 115 1.5 H2.2K 135 59.6 115 1.5
200V

400V
FR-HAL-(H)K 3.7K 115 83 115 2.2 H3.7K 135 70.6 115 2.5
5.5K 115 83 115 2.3 H5.5K 160 72 142 3.5 H
7.5K 130 100 135 4.2 H7.5K 160 91 142 5.0
11K 160 111 164 5.2 H11K 160 91 146 6.0
W
15K 160 126 167 7.0 H15K 220 105 195 9.0
(Note) 1. Make selection according to the applied motor capacity. (When the inverter capacity is larger than
the motor capacity, make selection according to the motor capacity)
2. Approximately 88% of the power factor improving effect can be obtained (92.3% when calculated with 1 power factor for the fundamental
wave according to the Architectural Standard Specifications (Electrical Installation) (2013 revision) supervised by the Ministry of Land,
Infrastructure, Transport and Tourism of Japan).
(Effect of power factor may decline slightly when using a single-phase power input model.)
3. Outline dimension drawing shown is a one of a typical model. The shape differs according to each models.
4. Install the AC reactor (FR-HAL) horizontally or vertically.
5. Keep enough clearance around the reactor because it heats up. (Keep a minimum clearance of 10cm each on top and bottom and minimum
5cm each on right and left regardless of the installation orientation.)

 Outline dimension
(Unit: mm)
Mass Mass
Inverter Model W D H (kg) Inverter Model W D H (kg) Less than D
0.4K 70 61 71 0.4 H0.4K 90 60 78 0.6
0.75K 85 61 81 0.5 H0.75K 66 70 100 0.8
1.5K 85 70 81 0.8 H1.5K 66 80 100 1
DC reactor
2.2K 85 70 81 0.9 H2.2K 76 80 110 1.3
200V

400V

(for power 3.7K 77 82 92 1.5 H3.7K 86 95 120 2.3

5.5K 77 92 92 1.9 H5.5K 96 100 128 3 H
coordination) W
7.5K 86 98 113 2.5 H7.5K 96 105 128 3.5
FR-HEL-(H)K 11K 105 112 133 3.3 H11K 105 110 137 4.5
15K 105 115 133 4.1 H15K 105 125 152 5
(Note) 1. Be sure to remove the jumper across the inverter terminals P/+-P1. (A failure to do so will produce no power factor improving effect))
2. The wiring length between the reactor and inverter should be within 5m.
3. The size of the cables used should be equal to or larger than that of the power supply cables (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3).
4. Make selection according to the motor capacity. (When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, make selection according to
the motor capacity)
5. Approximately 93% of the power factor improving effect can be obtained (94.4% when calculated with 1 power factor for the fundamental
wave according to the Architectural Standard Specifications (Electrical Installation) (2013 revision) supervised by the Ministry of Land,
Infrastructure, Transport and Tourism of Japan).
(Effect of power factor may decline slightly when using a single-phase 200V power input model.)
6. Outline dimension drawing shown is a one of a typical model.
The shape differs according to each model.
7. Install the DC reactor (FR-HEL) horizontally or vertically.
8. Keep enough clearance around the reactor because it heats up. (Keep a minimum clearance of 10cm each on top and bottom and minimum
5cm each on right and left regardless of the installation orientation.)
9. Single-phase 100V power input model is not compatible with the DC reactor.

78
 Name (Model) Specifications, Structure, etc.
 The EMC compliant EMC filter (EN61800-3 2nd Environment Category C3) is a filter compliant with the EU EMC Directive (EN61800-3 2nd
Environment Category C3).

Features
Outline dimension Leakage
(Unit: mm) current Loss
EMC filter Model Applicable inverter model Intercompatibility Mass (mA)  (W)
attachment  (kg) (reference
W H D
value)
SF1306 FR-E720-0.1K to 1.5K — 110 200 36.5 0.7 10 7.3
FR-E720-2.2K, 3.7K FR-E5T

Connection
SF1309 200 282 57 2.1 15 15

example
H
FR-E720S-2.2K FR-E7AT03
SF1320 FR-E720S-0.1K to 0.4K — 70 168 30.5 0.4 10 2.7
SF1321 FR-E720S-0.75K — 110 168 36.5 0.6 10 3.8
FR-E5NF-H0.75K FR-E740-0.4K, 0.75K — 140 210 46 1.1 22.6 5.5
FR-E5NF-H3.7K FR-E740-1.5K to 3.7K — 140 210 46 1.2 44.5 8

Specifications
Standard
FR-E5NF-H7.5K FR-E740-5.5K, 7.5K — 220 210 47 2 68.4 15
EMC Directive FR-S5NFSA-0.75K FR-E710W-0.1K to 0.4K — 70 168 35 0.5 4.5 1.74
compliant EMC filter FR-E720S-1.5K W D
FR-S5NFSA-1.5K — 110 168 35 0.7 9.5 8.55
FR-E710W-0.75K
SF
Outline dimension Leakage
FR-E5NF-HK

Dimension
(Unit: mm) current Loss

Drawings
EMC filter Model Applicable inverter model Intercompatibility Mass (mA)

Outline
 (W)
(400V class) attachment  (kg) (reference
W H D D1
value)
FR-S5NFSA-K FR-E720-5.5K, 7.5K FR-E5T-02
SF1260 222 468 80 39 5 440 118
(100V / 200V class) FR-E720-11K FR-A5AT03

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
SF1261 FR-E720-15K FR-AAT02 253 600 86 38 9.3 71 37

Explanation
SF1175 FR-E740-11K, 15K FR-AAT02 253 530 60 35 4.7 76 56

Diagram
 Depth is 12mm deeper when an intercompatibility attachment is installed.
 Leakage current for one phase of three-phase three-wire star-connection power supply. Leakage current for all phases
of three-phase three-wire delta-connection power supply is three times greater than the indicated value.
(Note) This is a sample outline dimension drawing. The shape differs by the model.

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
 Countermeasures for leakage current
Take the following actions to prevent malfunction of peripheral devices or an electric shock caused by leakage D
current. W
1) Earth (ground) the EMC filter before connecting the power supply. When doing so, confirm that earthing (grounding)
D1
is securely performed through the earthing (grounding) part of the enclosure.
2) Select an appropriate earth leakage circuit breaker or an earth leakage relay by considering leakage current of the EMC filter. Note that earth
leakage circuit breaker may not be used in some cases such as when leakage current of the EMC filter is too large. In that case, use an earth

Parameter
leakage relay with high sensitivity. When both of earth leakage circuit breaker and earth leakage relay cannot be used, securely earth (ground) as

List
explained in 1).

 Outline dimension
Radio noise filter
RST <Three-phase power supply> <Single-phase power supply>
FR-BIF (200V class)

Explanations

Parameters
Red White Blue Green Inverter Inverter
FR-BIF-H (400V class) Leakage currents: 4mA MCCB MCCB

of
R/L1 Power R/L1
Power
300

S/L2 supply S/L2

supply T/L3
Insulate
29 φ4.3 hole
41

Protective
Earth (Ground) Earth (Ground)

Functions
4

Radio noise filter Radio noise filter

58 29 7 FR-BIF(-H) FR-BIF(-H)
44 (Unit: mm)
(Note) 1. Cannot be connected to the inverter output side.
2. The wire should be cut as short as possible, and connected to the inverter terminal block.

Options
3. To use the radio noise filter (FR-BIF) for the single-phase input model, ensure the insulation of the T-phase before connecting the filter to the
input side of the inverter.
 Outline dimension
FR-BSF01 FR-BLF
MCCB Inverter
Instructions

110
Power
31.5

R/L1
95 supply S/L2
2-φ5
Line noise filter
7

φ7 130 T/L3
22.5

Line noise filter

FR-BSF01 85 (Note) 1. Each phase should be wound at least 3 times (4T,
(for inverters with 4 turns) in the same direction. (The greater the
number of turns, the more effective result is
Motor

small capacities) 65
35
80

33 obtained.)
FR- BLF When using several line noise filters to make 4T or
more, wind the phases (cables) together. Do not
use different line noise filters for different phases.
2.3

160
65

2. When the thickness of the wire prevents winding,

Compatibility

180 use at least 4 in series and ensure that the current

4.5

passes through each phase in the same direction.

3. Can be used on the output side in the same way
as the input side. When using filters on the output
side, do not wind the cable more than 3 times (4T)
for each filter because the filter may overheat.
4. Use FR-BSF01 for the inverters with small
Warranty

capacities. Thick wires (38mm2 or more) cannot

be used. In such cases, use the FR-BLF.
5. Do not wind an earthing cable.
Inquiry

79
 Name (Model) Specifications, Structure, etc.
 Using the option, the inverter may conform to the Japanese guideline for reduction of harmonic emission.
 The option is available for three-phase 200V/400V class inverters with 0.4K to 15K capacity.
 Specification
• Three-phase 200V power input model
Model FR-BFP2-K 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15
Permissible inverter output current (A)  2.5 4.2 7 10 16.5 23.8 31.8 45 58
Approximate mass (kg) 1.3 1.4 2.0 2.2 2.8 3.8 4.5 6.7 7.0
Install a DC reactor on the DC side.
Power factor improving reactor 93% to 95% of power supply power factor under 100% load (94.4% )
Common mode choke Install a ferrite core on the input side.
Noise filter
Capacitive filter About 4mA of capacitor leakage current 
Protective structure (JEM1030) Open type (IP00)
• Three-phase 400V power input mode
Model FR-BFP2-HK 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15
Permissible inverter output current (A)  1.2 2.2 3.7 5 8.1 12 16.3 23 29.5
Approximate mass (kg) 1.6 1.7 1.9 2.3 2.6 4.5 5.0 7.0 8.2
Install a DC reactor on the DC side.
Power factor improving reactor 93% to 95% of power supply power factor under 100% load (94.4% )
Common mode choke Install a ferrite core on the input side.
Noise filter
Capacitive filter About 8mA of capacitor leakage current 
Protective structure (JEM1030) Open type (IP00)
 Select a capacity for the load (inverter output) current to be equal to or less than the permissible inverter output current.
 The indicated leakage current is for one phase of the three-phase three-wire star-connection power supply.
 The values in parentheses are calculated with 1 fundamental frequency power factor according to the Year 2013 Standard specification for public
constructions (electric installation works), published by the Ministry of Land, Infrastructure, Transport and Tourism in Japan.
Filterpack
FR-BFP2-(H)K  Outline dimension drawing
<FR-BFP2-0.4K, 0.75K, 1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K> <FR-BFP2-5.5K, 7.5K, 11K, 15K>
<FR-BFP2-H0.4K, H0.75K, H1.5K, H2.2K, H3.7K> <FR-BFP2-H5.5K, H7.5K, H11K, H15K>
2-φ4.5 hole 2-φ4.5 hole 2-fC hole 2-fC hole

H2
H2
5
5

H1

H1
H
H1

Rating
Rating plate
H1

plate
H

H2
H2

C1 C1
12.5 D1 12.5 25 145 25
D (25) 195
220
L-bracket for inverter
back installation
(Enclosed with the option) 
5
5

4.5 4.5
D2 D1 D2 W2 W1 W2
D W

Capacity H H1 H2 D
C C1 C2 D1
5.5K, 7.5K 210 198 6 75 50
4.5 4.5 5.3
200V

Capacity W W1 W2 H H1 D D1 D2 11K 320 305 7.5 6 85 60

6 5.3
0.4K, 0.75K 68 30 19 218 208 60 30 15 15K 320 305 7.5 6 85 60
6 6.4
400V 200V

1.5K, 2.2K 108 55 26.5 188 178 80 55 12.5 H5.5K, H7.5K 210 198 6 4.575 50
4.5 4.3
400V

3.7K 170 120 25 188 178 65 40 12.5 H11K 320 305 7.5 6 85 60
6 4.3
H0.4K, H0.75K 108 55 26.5 188 178 55 30 12.5 H15K 320 305 7.5 6 85 60
6 6.4
H1.5K, H2.2K, H3.7K 108 55 26.5 188 178 80 55 12.5 (Unit: mm)
 L-bracket is not attached when shipped from the factory but is enclosed
(Unit: mm) with the option. L-bracket is required to install the option to the back of
 The 400V class H0.4K and H0.75K have no slit. inverter.
(Note) 1. The option can be installed to the back or to the side. (The option cannot be installed to the back of FR-E720-5.5K/7.5K, FR-E740-0.4K to 3.7K.)
2. Above outline dimension drawings are examples. Dimensions differ by model.
 Outline dimension
MRS type MYS type
182 500 230
500
172 220
Round Round
4.3
42

crimp
4.3
60

crimp
terminals terminals
φ4.3 hole
1.25-4 1.25-4
20
3.5
20
1.2

Brake resistor (Unit : mm) (Unit : mm)

MRS type, MYS type Resistance Permissible Applicable
Control torque /
Resistor Model Value Power Motor Capacity
permissible duty
() (W) (kW)
MRS120W200 200 15 0.4
MRS120W100 150% torque 3%ED 100 30 0.75 (Note) 1. The temperature of the brake resistor
MRS 1.5 becomes 200ºC or more depending on
MRS120W60 60 55
200V 

type 100% torque 3%ED 2.2 the operation frequency, care must be
150% torque 3%ED 2.2 taken for installation and heat
MRS120W40 40 80
100% torque 3%ED 3.7 dissipation.
MYS 150% torque 3%ED 2. The brake resistor cannot be used with
MYS220W50  50/2 280 3.7
type 100% torque 6%ED the 0.1K and 0.2K.
 The option can also be connected to a single-phase 100V class inverter.
 Two unit in parallel

80
 Name (Model) Specifications, Structure, etc.
 Outline dimension
(Unit: mm)
Outline Dimension Outline Dimension

Approx. Mass

Approx. Mass

Features
Resistance

Resistance
Permissible Permissible

Value

Value
Brake Resistor Brake Resistor

(kg)

(kg)
()

()
Brake Brake
Model W W1 D H Model W W1 D H
Duty Duty

FR-ABR-0.4K 10% 140 500 40 21 200 0.2 FR-ABR-H0.4K 10% 115 500 40 21 1200 0.2

Connection
example
FR-ABR-0.75K 10% 215 500 40 21 100 0.4 FR-ABR-H0.75K 10% 140 500 40 21 700 0.2
FR-ABR-H1.5K 10% 215 500 40 21 350 0.4
FR-ABR-2.2K 10% 240 500 50 26 60 0.5
FR-ABR-H2.2K 10% 240 500 50 26 250 0.5
High-duty
200V

400V
FR-ABR-3.7K 10% 215 500 61 33 40 0.8 FR-ABR-H3.7K 10% 215 500 61 33 150 0.8

Specifications
brake resistor

Standard
FR-ABR-5.5K 10% 335 500 61 33 25 1.3 FR-ABR-H5.5K 10% 335 500 61 33 110 1.3
FR-ABR-(H)K FR-ABR-7.5K 10% 400 500 80 40 20 2.2 FR-ABR-H7.5K 10% 400 500 80 40 75 2.2
FR-ABR-11K 6% 400 700 100 50 13 3.5 FR-ABR-H11K 6% 400 700 100 50 52 3.2
18 2.4 18 2.4
FR-ABR-15K 6% 300 700 100 50 FR-ABR-H15K 6% 300 700 100 50
(1/2) (2) (2) (2)

Dimension
Drawings
 The option can also be connected to a single-phase 100V class inverter.

Outline
 For the 1.5K and 2.2K inverter.
 For the 15K brake resistor, configure so that two 18 resistors are connected in parallel.
 For the 15K brake resistor, configure so that two 18 resistors are connected in series. FR-ABR-15K is indicated on the resistor.
(same resistor as the 200V class 15K)

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection

Explanation
(Note) 1. The regenerative brake duty setting should be less than permissible brake duty in the table

Diagram
D
H above.
2. The temperature of the brake resistor becomes 300C or more depending on the operation
frequency, care must be taken for installation and heat dissipation.
W1+20 3. MYS type resistor can be also used. Note that the permissible brake duty.

Operation panel

FR Configurator
4. The brake resistor cannot be used with the 0.1K and 0.2K.

Parameter unit
0 W 5. Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.

 A brake unit is an option that fully enhances the regenerative braking capability of the inverter, and should be used with an electrical-
discharge resistor. Select from two discharging resistor according to the required braking torque.
 Specification

Parameter
<Brake Unit>

List
200V  400V
Model FR-BU2-
1.5K 3.7K 7.5K 15K 30K H7.5K H15K H30K
Applicable motor capacity Capacity of the motor to be used with differs according to the braking torque and duty (%ED)
Connected brake resistor GRZG type, FR-BR (refer to the table below for combinations)

Explanations

Parameters
Up to 10 units
Multiple (parallel) operation
Brake unit (note that torque generated is not more than the tolerable overcurrent amount of connected inverter)

of
Approximate mass (kg) 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.4 0.9 0.9 1.4
FR-BU2-(H)K  The option can also be connected to a single-phase 100V class inverter.
<Discharging resistor>
Resistor unit 200V 400V

Protective
Functions
Model GRZG type  GZG300W-50 GRZG200-10 GRZG300-5 GRZG400-2 GRZG200-10 GRZG300-5 GRZG400-2
FR-BR-(H)K (1 unit) (3 units) (4 units) (6 units) (3 units) (4 units) (6 units)
3 in series 4 in series 6 in series 6 in series 8 in series 12 in series
Number of connectable units 1 unit
(1 set) (1 set) (1 set) (2 sets) (2 sets) (2 sets)
Discharging resistor Brake resistor total resistance value () 50 30 20 12 60 40 24
GZG type Continuous permissible power (W) 100 300 600 1200 600 1200 2400

Options
 The 1 set contains the number of units in the parentheses. For the 400V class, 2 sets are required.
GRZG type
<Resistor unit>
200V 400V
Model FR-BR-
15K 30K H15K H30K
Instructions

Brake resistor total resistance value () 8 4 32 16

Continuous permissible power (W) 990 1990 990 1990
Approximate mass (kg) 15 30 15 30

 Combinations of brake unit and resistor unit

Discharging Resistor/Resistor Unit Model
Brake Unit GRZG type
Motor

FR-BR
Model  Number of connectable units
FR-BU2-1.5K GZG 300W-50 (1 unit) 1 unit —
FR-BU2-3.7K GRZG 200-10 (3 units) 3 in series (1 set) —
200V
class FR-BU2-7.5K GRZG 300-5 (4 units) 4 in series (1 set) —
Compatibility

FR-BU2-15K GRZG 400-2 (6 units) 6 in series (1 set) FR-BR-15K

FR-BU2-30K — — FR-BR-30K
FR-BU2-H7.5K GRZG 200-10 (3 units) 6 in series (2 sets) —
400V
FR-BU2-H15K GRZG 300-5 (4 units) 8 in series (2 sets) FR-BR-H15K
class
FR-BU2-H30K GRZG 400-2 (6 units) 12 in series (2 sets) FR-BR-H30K
 The 1 set contains the number of units in the parentheses. For the 400V class, 2 sets are required.
Warranty
Inquiry

81
 Name (Model) Specifications, Structure, etc.
 Selection
<When GRZG type is connected>
 The maximum temperature rise of the discharging resistors is approximately 100C. Use heat-resistant wires and wire to avoid contact
with resistors.
 Do not touch the discharging resistor while the power is ON or for about 10 minutes after the power supply turns OFF. Otherwise you
may get an electric shock.
Power Supply Motor (kW)
0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15
Voltage Braking torque
200V 50% 30s FR-BU2-1.5K FR-BU2-3.7K FR-BU2-7.5K FR-BU2-15K
class 100% 30s FR-BU2-1.5K FR-BU2-3.7K FR-BU2-7.5K FR-BU2-15K 2  FR-BU2-15K
400V 50% 30s — FR-BU2-H7.5K FR-BU2-H15K
class 100% 30s — FR-BU2-H7.5K FR-BU2-H15K FR-BU2-H30K
 The number before the model name explains the number of connectable units in parallel.
 The inverter for 400V class 1.5K or lower cannot be used in combination with a brake unit. To use in combination with a brake unit, use the inverter of
2.2K or higher.
<When FR-BR is connected>
 The temperature rise of the resistor unit is about a maximum of 100C. Therefore, use heat-resistant wires (such as glass wires).
%ED at short-time rating when braking torque is 100% Braking torque (%) at short-time rating when 10%ED is 15s
Motor Capacity 5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW 15kW Motor Capacity 5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW 15kW
200V FR-BU2-15K 80 40 15 10 200V FR-BU2-15K Injection brake 280 200 120 100
%ED
class FR-BU2-30K — — 65 30 class FR-BU2-30K torque (%) — — 260 180
400V FR-BU2-H15K 80 40 15 10 400V FR-BU2-H15K Injection brake 280 200 120 100
%ED
class FR-BU2-H30K — — 65 30 class FR-BU2-H30K torque (%) — — 260 180

tb
Regeneration duty factor (operation frequency)%ED 100 tb<15s (continuous operation time)
tc
Example 1 Travel operation Example 2 Lift operation
Ascending
Speed

Speed

Descending
Time t Time t
Brake unit tb
tc
FR-BU2-(H)K t1

tc t2 t3 t4 tb=t1+t2+t3+t4
Resistor unit  Connection diagram
FR-BR-(H)K ON OFF
T *3
MC
Discharging resistor MC
Resistor unit or
Inverter discharging resistor
GZG type MCCB MC
Resistor unit or
Three-phase R/L1 U Motor
P discharging resistor P
GRZG type AC power supply
S/L2 V IM PR PR
T/L3 W

PR A PR A
P/+ P/+ B P/+ B
*2
N/- N/- C N/- C
*2 *2

RES RES
Reset
BUE *1 BUE *1
Brake permission signal SD SD
MSG MSG
Signal for SD SD
master/slave MSG MSG
SD SD
 A jumper is connected across BUE and SD in the
initial status. Brake unit Brake unit
 Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and FR-BU2 FR-BU2
brake unit (FR-BU2) terminals so that their
terminal symbols match with each other. When connecting
Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. Do several brake units
not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1
except when connecting a DC reactor.
 When the power supply is 400V class, install a
step-down transformer.

 Outline dimension drawings

<FR-BU2> <GZG,GRZG> <FR-BR>
D
H
H

W D H

W W
D

(Unit: mm) (Unit: mm) (Unit: mm)

Model W H D Model W H D Model W H D
FR-BU2-1.5K to 15K 68 128 132.5 GZG300W 335 78 40 FR-BR-15K 170 450 220
FR-BU2-30K 108 128 129.5 GRZG200 306 55 26 FR-BR-30K 340 600 220
FR-BU2-H7.5K, H15K 68 128 132.5 GRZG300 334 79 40 FR-BR-H15K 170 450 220
FR-BU2-H30K 108 128 129.5 GRZG400 411 79 40 FR-BR-H30K 340 600 220

82
 Name (Model) Specifications, Structure, etc.
 Enables 100%-torque continuous regeneration to support continuous regenerative operation for line control, etc. (Maximum torque 150% 60s)
 Eliminates the need to use a brake unit with each inverter, reducing total space and total cost.
 Saves energy since regeneration energy is used for the other inverters and excess energy is returned to the power supply.

Features
 Heatsink protrusion type has the heat generating section outside of the enclosure, and exhaust the converter generated heat to the outside
of enclosure.
 Connection diagram

R/L1 U

Connection
S/L2 *1

example
T/L3 V IM
W
*5
Dedicated stand-alone FR-CV type power
reactor (FR-CVL) regeneration common converter
MC1 Inverter

Specifications
MCCB
R/L11 R2/L12

Standard
R2/L1
Three-phase S/L21 S2/L22
S2/L2 P/L+ P/+
AC power supply T/L31 T2/L32 *2
T2/L3 N/L- N/-

P24 PC
R/L11 SD SD
S/L21 *4
RDYA *6
T/MC1

Dimension
Drawings
RDYB X10 *3
Power regeneration

Outline
RSO RES *4

common converter SE SD

FR-CV-(H)K
 Keep power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) open. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. Opposite polarity of terminals N/-, P/+ will damage

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
the inverter.
 Do not insert an MCCB between the terminals P/+-N/- (between P/L+-P/+, between N/L--N/-). Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and power

Explanation
Diagram
regeneration common converter terminals so that their terminal symbols match with each other. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.
 Assign the terminal for X10 signal using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 (input terminal function selection).
 Always connect the power supply and terminals R/L11, S/L21, T/MC1. If the inverter is operated without connection, the power regeneration common
converter will be damaged.
 Install the dedicated stand-alone reactor (FR-CVL) horizontally.

Operation panel

FR Configurator
 Be sure to connect terminal RDY of the FR-CV to the X10 or MRS signal assigned terminal of the inverter, and connect terminal SE of the FR-CV to

Parameter unit
terminal SD of the inverter. Without proper connecting, FR-CV will be damaged.
 Outline dimension drawings
<FR-CV-(H)> <FR-CV-(H)-AT> FR-CV-(H) (Unit mm)
Voltage/Capacity W H D D1 Voltage/Capacity W H D D1
7.5K/11K 90 300 303 103
7.5K/11K/15K 120 300 305 105
15K 120 300 305 105
200V

400V

Parameter
H 22K/30K 150 380 322 122 22K/30K 150 380 305 105

List
H
37K/55K 400 620 250 135 37K/55K 400 620 250 135
FR-CV-(H)-AT (Unit mm)
Voltage/Capacity W H D D1 Voltage/Capacity W H D D1
7.5K/11K 110 330 315 115

Explanations
D1 D1

Parameters
W W 7.5K/11K/15K 130 330 320 120
200V

400V

D
15K 130 330 320 120
D
22K/30K 160 410 350 150 22K/30K 160 410 350 150

of
<FR-CVL>
FR-CVL (Unit mm)
D Voltage/Capacity W H D Voltage/Capacity W H D
7.5K/11K/15K 165 155 130 7.5K/11K 220 200 135
22K 165 155 140 15K 220 205 135

Protective
Functions
200V

30K 215 175 160 22K 220 215 150

400V

H
37K 220 200 320 30K 245 220 185
55K 250 225 335 37K 245 265 230
55K 290 280 230
W

Options
 Substantially suppresses power harmonics to realize the  The power regeneration function comes standard.
equivalent capacity conversion factor K5 = 0 in "the Harmonic  The common converter driving with several inverters is possible.
Suppression Guidelines for Consumers Who Receive High
Voltage or Special High Voltage" in Japan.
 Specifications
Instructions

200V 400V  The total capacity of the connected inverters.

Model FR-HC2- 
7.5K 15K 30K 55K 75K H560K  If a high power factor converter (FR-HC2) is
Applicable inverter 3.7K to 7.5K to 15K to 30K to 37K to purchased, it comes with reactor 1 (FR-HCL21),
280K to 560K
capacity  7.5K 15K 30K 55K 75K reactor 2 (FR-HCL22), and an outside box (FRHCB2)
Rated input voltage/ Three-phase 200V to 220V 50Hz Three-phase 380V (If an H280K or higher is purchased, it comes with
High power factor frequency 200V to 230V 60Hz to 460V 50/60Hz FR-HCL21, FR-HCL22, FR-HCC2, FR-HCR2, and
converter Rated input current (A) 33 61 115 215 278 993 FR-HCM2.)
Motor

FR-HC2- (H)K  Outline dimension

(Unit: mm)
High Power Factor Converter Reactor 1 Reactor 2 Outside Box
Voltage Capacity FR-HC2 FR-HCL21  FR-HCL22  FR-HCB2 
W H D W H D W H D W H D
Compatibility

7.5K 220 260 170 132 150 100 237.5 230 140
190 320 165
15K 250 400 190 162 172 126 257.5 260 165
200V 30K 325 550 195 195 210 150 342.5 305 180
(FR-HCL21) (FR-HCB2)(FR-HCL22) FR-HC2 270 450 203
55K 370 620 250 210 180 200.5 432.5 380 280
Provided appliances
75K 465 620 300 240 215 215.5 474 460 280 400 450 250
400V H560K 790 1330 440 452 545 645 632 720 745 — — —
Warranty

High power factor converter Outside box Reactor 1, Reactor 2

P.CPY PWR

FAN
REGEN....... DRIVE

PSCLR

 Install reactors (FR-HCL21 and 22) on a horizontal

H

surface.
H

 FR-HCB2 is not provided for H280K or higher. A

Inquiry

filter capacitor and inrush current limit resistors are

W D W D provided instead.
W D

83
 Name (Model) Specifications, Structure, etc.
 When driving the 400V class motor by the inverter, this filter suppresses the surge voltage generates at the motor terminal.
 This can be applied to FR-E740-5.5K to 15K.
 Specifications  Connection diagram
Model FR-BMF-HK 7.5 15
Applicable motor within 100m
5.5 7.5 11 15
capacity (kW)  MCCB MC Inverter FR-BMF
Rated current (A) 17 31 Three-phase R U X Motor
AC power S V Y IM
Overload current 150 60s, 200% 0.5s T W Z
supply
rating (inverse-time characteristics)
Rated input AC T* TH0
Three phase 380 to 480V
voltage
Permissible AC TH1
323 to 528V MC
voltage fluctuation ON OFF
Maximum frequency 120Hz
PWM carrier frequency 2kHz or less
MC
Protective structure
Open type (IP00) * Install a step-down transformer.
(JEM 1030)
Cooling system Self-cooling
Maximum wiring
100m or less
length
Approximate mass
5.5 9.5
(kg)
Surrounding air
-10°C to +50°C(non-freezing)
temperature
Environment

Ambient humidity 90%RH maximum (non-condensing)

Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas,
Atmosphere
oil mist, dust and dirt)

Altitude/vibration Maximum 1000m, 5.9m/s2 or less at 10 to 55Hz

(directions of X, Y, Z axes) 
 The applied motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor.
 The capacity depends on the specifications of the inverter (400V class) connected.
 The setting of Pr.72 PWM frequency selection should be 2kHz or less.
Surge voltage  When using with the filter pack installed on the rear panel, do not install this combination on moving objects or places that have vibrations
(exceeding 1.96m/s2).
suppression filter
FR-BMF-HK
 Outline dimension
FR-BMF-H7.5K FR-BMF-H15K
230 2- φ 6 hole 260 2- φ 10 hole
208 230
75 195 100
195
4-M5 4-M8 180 50 31
150 45 13.5

4-M4

6-M5
138

245
285
245

380
325
340
325

480
500
457

Terminal layout
X Y Z TH0 TH1
149.5

Rating

Rating

Earth terminal (M5)

plate

plate

Earth terminal Terminal layout

205
165

(M6) X Y Z TH0 TH1

60

7.5
370

6 6
80
7.5

33
420

Red White Blue Crimp terminal 5.5-4

10

(U) (V) (W) 10 10

Isolation cap color

Main terminal block (M4) Red White Blue Crimp terminal: 8-6
(U) (V) (W)
2.3 Control terminal block (M3) Isolation cap color

Main terminal block (M5)

2.3 Control terminal block (M3)
2.3

2.3

(Unit: mm)

84
 Peripheral devices/cable size list

Features
Molded Case Circuit Breaker Input Side
(MCCB) Recommended Cable
Magnetic Reactor
or Earth Leakage Current Breaker Contactor Gauge (mm2)
(ELB) (NF or NV type)
Motor
Voltage

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3

Connection
Applicable Inverter Output Power Factor

example
Power Factor Improving (AC or Improving (AC or Power Factor
(kW) Improving (AC or
DC) Reactor Connection DC) Reactor U, V, W FR-HAL FR-HEL
Connection DC) Reactor
Connection
Without With Without With Without With

Specifications
Standard
FR-E720-0.1K 0.1 5A 5A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2 0.4K 0.4K
FR-E720-0.2K 0.2 5A 5A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2 0.4K 0.4K
FR-E720-0.4K 0.4 5A 5A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2 0.4K 0.4K
Three-phase 200V

FR-E720-0.75K 0.75 10A 10A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2 0.75K 0.75K

Dimension
Drawings
FR-E720-1.5K 1.5 15A 15A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2 1.5K 1.5K

Outline
FR-E720-2.2K 2.2 20A 15A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2 2.2K 2.2K
FR-E720-3.7K 3.7 30A 30A S-T21 S-T10 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.7K 3.7K
FR-E720-5.5K 5.5 50A 40A S-T35 S-T21 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5K 5.5K

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
FR-E720-7.5K 7.5 60A 50A S-T35 S-T35 14 8 8 7.5K 7.5K

Explanation
Diagram
FR-E720-11K 11 75A 75A S-T35 S-T35 14 14 14 11K 11K
FR-E720-15K 15 125A 100A S-T50 S-T50 22 22 22 15K 15K
FR-E740-0.4K 0.4 5A 5A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2 H0.4K H0.4K
FR-E740-0.75K 0.75 5A 5A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2 H0.75K H0.75K

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
Three-phase 400V

FR-E740-1.5K 1.5 10A 10A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2 H1.5K H1.5K

FR-E740-2.2K 2.2 15A 10A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2 H2.2K H2.2K
FR-E740-3.7K 3.7 20A 15A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2 H3.7K H3.7K
FR-E740-5.5K 5.5 30A 20A S-T21 S-T12 3.5 2 2 H5.5K H5.5K

Parameter
FR-E740-7.5K 7.5 30A 30A S-T21 S-T21 3.5 3.5 3.5 H7.5K H7.5K

List
FR-E740-11K 11 50A 40A S-T21 S-T21 5.5 5.5 5.5 H11K H11K
FR-E740-15K 15 60A 50A S-T35 S-T21 8 5.5 5.5 H15K H15K
FR-E720S-0.1K 0.1 5A 5A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2 0.4K 0.4K
Single-Phase 200V

FR-E720S-0.2K 0.2 5A 5A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2 0.4K 0.4K

Explanations

Parameters
FR-E720S-0.4K 0.4 10A 10A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2 0.75K 0.75K

of
FR-E720S-0.75K 0.75 15A 10A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2 1.5K 1.5K
FR-E720S-1.5K 1.5 20A 20A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2 2.2K 2.2K
FR-E720S-2.2K 2.2 40A 30A S-T21 S-T10 3.5 3.5 2 3.7K 3.7K

Protective
Functions

Single-Phase 100V

FR-E710W-0.1K 0.1 10A 5A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2 0.75K, 

FR-E710W-0.2K 0.2 10A 10A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2 1.5K,  

FR-E710W-0.4K 0.4 15A 15A S-T10 S-T10 2 2 2 2.2K,  

Options
FR-E710W-0.75K 0.75 30A 20A S-T10 S-T10 3.5 3.5 2 3.7K,  

 Select an MCCB according to the inverter power supply capacity.

Install one MCCB per inverter.
MCCB INV IM
MCCB INV IM
Instructions

 For use in the United States or Canada, refer to "Instructions for UL and cUL" in the Instruction Manual (Basic), and select an appropriate fuse or molded
case circuit breaker (MCCB).
 The magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic contactor
is used for emergency stop during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times.
If using an MC for emergency stop during motor driving, select an MC regarding the inverter input side current as JEM1038-AC-3 class rated current. When
Motor

using an MC on the inverter output side for commercial-power supply operation switching using a general purpose motor, select an MC regarding the motor
rated current as JEM1038-AC-3 class rated current.
 When using a single-phase power input model, terminals are R/L1 and S/L2.
Compatibility

 The cable size is that of the cable (HIV cable (600V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable) etc.) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C.
Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
 When connecting a single-phase 100V power input inverter to a power transformer (50kVA or more), install a AC reactor (FR-HAL) so that the performance
is more reliable.
 The power factor may be slightly lower.
Warranty

 Single-phase 100V power input model is not compatible with DC reactor.

Note
 When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to
the inverter type and cable and reactor according to the motor output.
Inquiry

 When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts
of the inverter, etc. Identify the cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power on the breaker.

85
 Selecting the rated sensitivity current for the earth leakage current breaker

When using the earth leakage current breaker with the inverter Example
circuit, select its rated sensitivity current as follows,
independently of the PWM carrier frequency. 5.5mm2 5m 5.5mm2 50m
 Breaker designed for harmonic and surge suppression ELB Noise
Rated sensitivity current In10(Ig1+Ign+Igi+Ig2+Igm) filter 3φ
 Standard breaker Inverter IM 200V2.2kW
Rated sensitivity current In10{Ig1+Ign+Igi+3X(Ig2+Igm)}
Ig1, Ig2: Leakage currents in wire path during commercial power supply Ig1 Ign Ig2 Igm
operation Igi
Ign : Leakage current of inverter input side noise filter
(Note) 1 Install the earth leakage breaker (ELB) on the input side of the inverter.
Igm : Leakage current of motor during commercial power supply operation
Igi : Leakage current of inverter unit 2 In the connection earthed-neutral system, the sensitivity current is blunt
against an earth (ground) fault in the inverter output side. Earthing (Grounding)
Example of leakage current of Example of leakage current must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and
cable path per 1km during the of three-phase induction motor electrical codes. (NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable
commercial power supply operation during the commercial standards)
when the CV cable is routed in power supply operation
metal conduit (200V 60Hz)
(200V 60Hz) Selection example (in the case of the above figure)
Leakage currents (mA)
Leakage currents (mA)

120 1.0
0.7 Breaker Designed for
0.5
100
0.3
Harmonic and Surge Standard Breaker
80 0.2 Suppression
60 0.1 Leakage current 5m
33  = 0.17
40
0.07
0.05
Ig1 (mA) 1,000m
0.03 Leakage current
20 0.02 0 (without noise filter)
Ign (mA)
0
2 3.5 8 142238 80150 0.1 0.2 0.75 2.2 5.5 11 20 Leakage current
1
5.5 30 60 100 0.4 1.5 3.7 7.5 15 Igi (mA)
Cable size (mm2) Motor capacity (kW) Leakage current 50m
33  = 1.65
Ig2 (mA) 1,000m
Example of leakage current per 1km during Example of leakage current of three-
the commercial power supply operation phase induction motor during the
Motor leakage
0.18
when the CV cable is routed in metal conduit commercial power supply operation current Igm (mA)
(Three-phase three-wire delta (Totally-enclosed fan-cooled Total leakage
3.00 6.66
connection 400V60Hz) type motor 400V60Hz) current (mA)
Rated sensitivity
current (mA) 30 100
Leakage currents (mA)

Leakage currents (mA)

120 2. 0
(Ig10)
100 1. 0
80 0. 7
0. 5
60
0. 3
40
0. 2
20
0 0. 1
2 3.5 8 142238 80150 1.5 3.7 7.5 15
5.5 30 60100 2.2 5.5 11 20
Cable size (mm ) 2
Motor capacity (kW)
For " " connection, the amount of leakage current is appox.1/3 of the above value.

86
Precautions for Operation/Selection

Precautions for use of the inverter Power supply

Safety Precautions  When the inverter is connected

Features
 To operate the inverter correctly and safely, be sure to read the under a large-capacity power
"instruction manual" before starting operation. transformer (500kVA or more Power
1500
Range
requiring
supply
 This product has not been designed or manufactured for use transformer) or when a power system 1000 installation
of the reactor
capacity
with any equipment or system operated under life-threatening capacitor is to be switched over, (kVA)

Connection
example
500

conditions. an excessive peak current may

0
 Please contact our sales office when you are considering using flow in the power input circuit, Wiring length (m) 10

this product in special applications such as passenger mobile, damaging the inverter.

Specifications
medical, aerospace, nuclear, power or undersea relay Also when connecting a single-phase 100V power input inverter

Standard
equipment or system. to a power transformer (50kVA or more), install a AC reactor
 Although this product is manufactured under strict quality (FR-HAL) so that the performance is more reliable.
control, safety devices should be installed when a serious To prevent this, always install an optional AC reactor (FR-HAL).

Dimension
 If a surge voltage occurs in the power supply system, this surge

Drawings
accident or loss is expected by a failure of this product.

Outline
 The load used should be a three-phase induction motor only. energy may flow into the inverter, causing the inverter to display
overvoltage protection (E.OV) and come to an inverter trip. To
Operation prevent this, always install an optional AC reactor (FR-HAL).

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection

Explanation
 A magnetic contactor (MC) provided on the input side should
Installation

Diagram
not be used to make frequent starts and stops. It could cause
the inverter to fail.  Avoid hostile environment where oil mist, fluff, dust particles,
 However, at this time, the motor cannot be brought to a sudden etc. are suspended in the air, and install the inverter in a clean

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
stop. Hence, provide a mechanical stopping/holding mechanism place or put it in an ingress-protected "enclosed" enclosure.
for the machine/equipment which requires an emergency stop. When placing the inverter in an enclosure, determine the
 It will take time for the capacitor to discharge after shutoff of the cooling system and enclosure dimensions so that the
inverter power supply. When accessing the inverter for surrounding air temperature of the inverter is within the

Parameter
inspection, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply permissible value. (refer to page 12 for the specified value)

List
has been switched off, and check to make sure that there are no  Do not install the inverter on wood or other flammable material
residual voltage using a tester or the like. as it will be hot partly.
 Install the inverter in the vertical orientation.

Explanations

Parameters
Wiring

of
Setting
 Application of power to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the
inverter will damage the inverter. Therefore, fully check the  The inverter can be operated as fast as a maximum of 400Hz by
parameter setting. Therefore, incorrect setting can cause a

Protective
Functions
wiring and sequence to ensure that wiring is correct, etc. before
power-ON. danger. Set the upper limit using the maximum frequency limit
 Terminals P/+, PR, P1, and N/- are for connection to dedicated setting function.
options and DC power supplies. Do not connect anything other  A setting higher than the initial value of DC injection brake
than a dedicated option and DC power supply. operation voltage or operation time can cause motor overheat

Options
Do not short the frequency setting power supply terminal 10 and (electronic thermal relay error).
common terminal 5 or the terminal PC and terminal SD.  Do not set Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty except for using
 To remove the wire connected to the control circuit terminal on the optional brake resistor. This function is used to protect the
Instructions

the safety stop function model, pull the wire while pressing down brake resistor from overheating. Do not set the value exceeding
the open/close button firmly with a flathead screwdriver. permissible duty of the brake resistor.
Otherwise, the terminal block may be damaged.
Motor
Compatibility
Warranty
Inquiry

87
 Precautions for selection Power transfer mechanism (reduction
gear, belt, chain, etc.)

Inverter capacity selection  When an oil-lubricated gear box, speed change/reduction gear
or similar device is used in the power transfer system, note that
 When operating a special motor or more than one motor in
continuous operation at low speed only may deteriorate oil
parallel with a single inverter, select the inverter capacity so that
lubrication, causing seizure. When performing fast operation at
1.05 times the total rated motor current is less than the rated
higher than 60Hz, fully note that such operation will cause
output current of the inverter.
strength shortage due to the noise, life or centrifugal force of the
 Setting 2kHz or more in Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection to perform
power transfer mechanism.
low acoustic noise operation with the surrounding air
temperature exceeding 40C, decrease the output current Instructions for overload operation
according to the rating table on page 10. (Also change the Pr. 9
 When performing operation of frequent start/stop of the inverter,
Electronic thermal O/L relay setting.)
rise/fall in the temperature of the transistor element of the
Starting torque of the motor inverter will repeat due to a repeated flow of large current,
shortening the life from thermal fatigue. Since thermal fatigue is
 The start and acceleration characteristics of the motor driven by
related to the amount of current, the life can be increased by
the inverter are restricted by the overload current rating of that
reducing current at locked condition, starting current, etc.
inverter. Generally the torque characteristic is less than when
Decreasing current may increase the life. However, decreasing
the motor is started by a commercial power supply. If torque
current will result in insufficient torque and the inverter may not
boost adjustment, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, or
start. Therefore, choose the inverter which has enough
General-purpose magnetic flux vector control cannot provide
allowance for current.
enough torque when a large starting torque is necessary, select
the inverter of one rank higher capacity or increase the
capacities of both the motor and inverter.

Acceleration/deceleration times
 The acceleration/deceleration time of the motor depends on the
motor-generated torque, load torque and moment of inertia of
the load (J).
 When the torque limit function or stall prevention function is
activated during acceleration/deceleration, increase the
acceleration/deceleration time as the actual time may become
longer.
 To decrease the acceleration/deceleration time, increase the
torque boost value (setting of a too large value may activate the
stall prevention function at a start, longer the acceleration time),
use the advanced magnetic flux vector control or general-
purpose magnetic flux vector control or increase the inverter
and motor capacities. To decrease the deceleration time, it is
necessary to add optional brake resistor MRS type, MYS type,
or FR-ABR (for the 0.4K or higher), the brake unit (FR-BU2),
power regeneration common converter (FR-CV), or a similar
device to absorb braking energy.

88
Precautions for Peripheral Device Selection

Installation and selection of Disuse of power factor improving

molded case circuit breaker capacitor (power capacitor)

Features
Install a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) on the power The power factor improving capacitor and surge suppressor on the
receiving side to protect the wiring of the inverter input side. For inverter output side may be overheated or damaged by the
MCCB selection, refer to page 85 since it depends on the inverter harmonic components of the inverter output. Also, since an
power supply side power factor (which changes depending on the excessive current flows in the inverter to activate overcurrent

Connection
power supply voltage, output frequency and load). Especially for a protection, do not install a capacitor or surge suppressor. For

example
completely electromagnetic MCCB, one of a slightly large capacity power factor improvement, use a DC reactor (refer to page 78).
must be selected since its operation characteristic varies with
harmonic currents. (Check it in the data of the corresponding Electrical corrosion of the bearing
breaker.) As an earth leakage current breaker, use the Mitsubishi

Specifications
 When a motor is driven by the inverter, axial voltage is

Standard
Electric earth leakage current breaker designed for harmonics and
generated on the motor shaft, which may cause electrical
surge suppression. (Refer to page 86)
corrosion of the bearing in rare cases depending on the wiring,
When installing a molded case circuit breaker on the output side of
load, operating conditions of the motor or specific inverter
the inverter, contact each manufacturer for selection of the molded
settings (high carrier frequency, use of a capacitive filter).
case circuit breaker.

Dimension
Drawings
Contact your sales representative to take appropriate

Outline
Handling of the inverter input side countermeasures for the motor.
The following shows examples of countermeasures for the
magnetic contactor inverter.

Terminal Specification
 Decrease the carrier frequency.

Terminal Connection
 For operation via external terminal (terminal STF or STR used),

Explanation
 Remove the capacitive filter.

Diagram
provide an input side MC to prevent an accident caused by a
natural restart at power recovery after a power failure, such as  Provide a common mode choke on the output side of the
an instantaneous power failure, and to ensure safety for inverter. (This is effective regardless of the use of the capacitive
maintenance work. Do not use this magnetic contactor to make filter.)

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
frequent starts and stops. (The switching life of the inverter input  Mitsubishi Electric capacitive filter: FR-BIF, SF, FR-E5NF-, FR-
circuit is about 1,000,000 times.) For parameter unit operation, S5NFSA, FR-BFP2-
an automatic restart after power failure is not made and the MC  Recommended common mode choke: FT-3KM F series FINEMET®
cannot be used to make a start. Note that the primary side MC common mode choke cores manufactured by Hitachi Metals, Ltd.
may be used to make a stop but the regenerative brake specific FINEMET is a registered trademark of Hitachi Metals, Ltd.

Parameter
to the inverter does not operate and the motor is coasted to a

List
stop. Wire thickness and wiring distance
 Installation of a magnetic contactor at the input side is
recommended. A magnetic contactor avoids overheat or When the wiring length between the inverter and motor is long,

Explanations
use thick wires so that the voltage drop of the main circuit cable is

Parameters
burnout of a brake resistor when heat capacity of the resistor is
insufficient or a brake regenerative transistor is damaged with 2% or less especially at low frequency output. (A selection

of
short while connecting an optional brake resistor. In this case, example for the wiring distance of 20m is shown on page 85)
shut-off the magnetic contactor when fault occurs and inverter Especially at a long wiring distance, the maximum wiring length
trips. should be within the length in the table below since the overcurrent

Protective
protection function may be misactivated by the influence of a

Functions
Handling of the inverter output charging current due to the stray capacitances of the wiring.
side magnetic contactor (The overall wiring length for connection of multiple motors should
be within the value in the table below.)
Switch the magnetic contactor between the inverter and motor Pr. 72 Setting 3.7K or
0.1K 0.2K 0.4K 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K

Options
only when both the inverter and motor are at a stop. When the (carrier frequency) higher
magnetic contactor is turned on while the inverter is operating, 100V,
200m 200m 300m 500m 500m 500m 500m
overcurrent protection of the inverter and such will activate. When 1 or less 200V
an MC is provided for switching to the commercial power supply, 400V — — 200m 200m 300m 500m 500m
100V,
Instructions

for example, switch it on/off after the inverter and motor have 30m 100m 200m 300m 500m 500m 500m
2 to 15 200V
stopped.
400V — — 30m 100m 200m 300m 500m
Thermal relay installation When using the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
function with wiring length exceeding 100m, select without
The inverter has an electronic thermal relay function to protect the frequency search (Pr. 162 = "1, 11").
Motor

motor from overheating. However, when running multiple motors Use the recommended connection cable when connecting the
with one inverter or operating a multi-pole motor, provide a thermal parameter unit.
relay (OCR) between the inverter and motor. In this case, set the For remote operation via analog signal, wire the control cable
electronic thermal relay function of the inverter to 0A. And for the between the operation box or operation signal and inverter within
Compatibility

setting of the thermal relay, add the line-to line leakage current 30m and away from the power circuits (main circuit and relay
(refer to page 90) to the current value on the motor rating plate. sequence circuit) to prevent induction from other devices.
For low-speed operation where the cooling capability of the motor When using the external potentiometer instead of the parameter
reduces, it is recommended to use a thermal relay protector unit to set the frequency, use a shielded or twisted cable, and do
incorporated motor. not earth (ground) the shield, but connect it to terminal 5 as shown
Warranty

below.
Measuring instrument on the Shielded cable
output side (3)
(2)
10(10E) (3)
(2)
10(10E)
2 2
When the inverter-to-motor wiring length is large, especially in the (1) (1)
5
Inquiry

400V class small-capacity models, the meters and CTs may generate Frequency setting Twisted 5 Frequency setting
potentiometer cable potentiometer
heat due to line-to-line leakage current. Therefore, choose the
equipment which has enough allowance for the current rating.

89
 Line leakage current
Earth (Ground)
Type Influence and Measures
When the inverter is run in the low acoustic noise mode, more • This leakage current flows via a static capacitance
leakage currents occur than in the non-low acoustic noise mode between the inverter output cables.
due to high-speed switching operation. Be sure to earth (ground) • The external thermal relay may be operated
the inverter and motor before use. In addition, always use the unnecessarily by the harmonics of the leakage current.
earth (ground) terminal of the inverter to earth (ground) the
When the wiring length is long (50m or more) for the
inverter. (Do not use the case and chassis)
400V class small capacity model (7.5kW or less), the
Noise external thermal relay is likely to operate unnecessarily
because the ratio of the leakage current to the rated
When performing low-noise operation at higher carrier frequency, motor current increases.
Influence and
electromagnetic noise tends to increase. Therefore, refer to the  Countermeasures
following measure example and consider taking the measures. measures
• Use Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay.
Depending on the installation condition, the inverter may be • If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the Pr.
affected by noise in a non-low noise (initial) status. 72 PWM frequency selection setting.
 The noise level can be reduced by decreasing the carrier Note that motor noise increases. Select Pr. 240 Soft-PWM
frequency (Pr. 72).
operation selection to make the sound inoffensive.
 As measures against AM radio broadcasting noise, radio noise
To ensure that the motor is protected against line-to-
filter FR-BIF produces an effect.
line leakage currents, it is recommended to use a
 As measures against sensor malfunction, line noise filter FR-
temperature sensor to directly detect motor
BSF01, FR-BLF produces an effect.
temperature.
 As measures against induction noise from the power cable of
the inverter, an effect is produced by putting a distance of 30cm MCCB MC Thermal relay Motor
(at least 10cm) or more and using a twisted pair shielded cable Power
Undesirable
as a signal cable. Do not earth (ground) shield but connect it to supply Inverter IM
current path
signal common cable. Line-to-line static
capacitances
Noise reduction examples Line-to-line leakage currents path
FR- BLF FR- BLF
Install common mode filter Decrease Install common mode filter
FR- BSF01 FR- BSF01
on inverter input side. Enclosure carrier frequency
on inverter output side.
Harmonic suppression guideline
Inverter
power FR- FR-
BSF01 Inverter BSF01 IM Motor
supply
Install capacitor type FR-BIF filter
Inverters have a converter section (rectifier circuit) and generate a
Use 4-core cable for motor
on inverter input side. FR-
BIF power cable and use one harmonic current.
cable as earthing cable.
Separate inverter and power
line by more than 30cm (at Use a twisted pair shielded cable
Harmonic currents flow from the inverter to a power receiving point
least 10cm) from sensor circuit.
Control Power
Sensor via a power transformer. The harmonic suppression guideline was
power
supply
supply
for sensor established to protect other consumers from these outgoing
Do not earth (ground)
harmonic currents.
Do not earth (ground) shield but
enclosure directly. connect it to signal common cable.
Do not earth (ground) control cable.
The three-phase 200V input specifications 3.7kW or less (single-
phase 200V power input model 2.2kW or less, single-phase 100V
Leakage currents power input model 0.75kW) are previously covered by "Harmonic
Capacitances exist between the inverter I/O cables, other cables suppression guideline for household appliances and general-
and earth and in the motor, through which a leakage current flows. purpose products" and other models are covered by "Harmonic
Since its value depends on the static capacitances, carrier suppression guideline for consumers who receive high voltage or
frequency, etc., low acoustic noise operation at the increased special high voltage". However, the transistorized inverter has
carrier frequency of the inverter will increase the leakage current. been excluded from the target products covered by "Harmonic
Therefore, take the following measures. Select the earth leakage suppression guideline for household appliances and general-
current breaker according to its rated sensitivity current, purpose products" in January 2004 and "Harmonic suppression
independently of the carrier frequency setting. (Refer to page 86) guideline for household appliances and general-purpose products"
was repealed on September 6, 2004.
To-earth (ground) leakage currents
All capacity and all models of general-purpose inverter used by
Type Influence and Measures specific consumers are covered by "Harmonic suppression
 Leakage currents may flow not only into the inverter's guideline for consumers who receive high voltage or special high
own line but also into the other line through the earth voltage".
(ground) cable, etc. These leakage currents may  "Harmonic suppression guideline for consumers who receive high
operate earth (ground) leakage circuit breakers and voltage or special high voltage"
earth leakage relays unnecessarily. This guideline sets forth the maximum values of harmonic currents
 Countermeasures
outgoing from a high-voltage or especially high-voltage consumer
who will install, add or renew harmonic generating equipment. If any
Influence and  If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the Pr.
of the maximum values are exceeded, this guideline requires the
measures 72 PWM frequency selection setting.
consumer to take certain suppression measures.
Note that motor noise increases. Select Pr. 240 Soft-
Users who use models other than the target models are not covered
PWM operation selection to make the sound inoffensive.
by the guideline. However, we ask to connect an AC reactor or a DC
 By using earth leakage circuit breakers designed for
reactor as before to the users who are not covered by the guideline.
harmonic and surge suppression in the inverter's own For compliance to the harmonic suppression guideline for
line and other line, operation can be performed with the consumers who receive high voltage or special high voltage
carrier frequency kept high (with low noise).

Inverter
Power NV1 Motor
supply C
Undesirable Leakage
breaker C
current path
NV2 Motor

Leakage C
breaker

90
 Table 2: Rated Capacities and Outgoing Harmonic Currents for Three-phase
Input
Target Inverter Drive
Power Countermeasures
Capacity Fundamental Outgoing Harmonic Current Converted from

Converted from 6.6kV (mA)

Supply

Fundamental Wave Current

Rated Capacity (kVA)

Features
Wave 6.6kV (mA)
Make a judgment based on "Harmonic Current (A) (No reactor, 100% operation ratio)

Motor kW
Applied
suppression guideline for consumers who
receive high voltage or special high voltage"
200V 400V 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
issued by the Japanese Ministry of Economy,

Connection
example
Trade and Industry (formerly Ministry of
International Trade and Industry) in 0.4 1.61 0.81 49 0.57 31.85 20.09 4.165 3.773 2.107 1.519 1.274 0.882

Single-phase September 1994 and take measures if 0.75 2.74 1.37 83 0.97 53.95 34.03 7.055 6.391 3.569 2.573 2.158 1.494
1.5 5.50 2.75 167 1.95 108.6 68.47 14.20 12.86 7.181 5.177 4.342 3.006
100V necessary. For calculation method of power

Specifications
2.2 7.93 3.96 240 2.81 156.0 98.40 20.40 18.48 10.32 7.440 6.240 4.320

Standard
Single-phase supply harmonics, refer to materials below. 3.7 13.0 6.50 394 4.61 257.1 161.5 33.49 30.34 16.94 12.21 10.24 7.092
200V All Reference materials 5.5 19.1 9.55 579 6.77 376.1 237.4 49.22 44.58 24.90 17.95 15.05 10.42
Three-phase capacities  "Harmonic suppression measures of the 7.5 25.6 12.8 776 9.07 504.4 318.2 65.96 59.75 33.37 24.06 20.18 13.97
11 36.9 18.5 1121 13.1 728.7 459.6 95.29 86.32 48.20 34.75 29.15 20.18
200V inverter"
15 49.8 24.9 1509 17.6 980.9 618.7 128.3 116.2 64.89 46.78 39.24 27.16
Three-phase Jan. 2004 Japan Electrical Manufacturer's

Dimension
Drawings
Outline
400V Association Table 3: Conversion Factors
 "Calculation method of harmonic current of Conversion
Classification Circuit Type
the general-purpose inverter used by Factor Ki
specific consumers" Without reactor K31 = 3.4

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
Three-phase bridge With reactor (AC side) K32 = 1.8

Explanation
JEM-TR201 (revised in Dec. 2003): Japan 3

Diagram
(Capacitor smoothing) With reactor (DC side) K33 = 1.8
Electrical Manufacturer's Association With reactors (AC, DC sides) K34 = 1.4
Japan Electrical Manufacturer's Association Single-phase bridge Without reactor K41 = 2.3
(capacitor smoothing,
For compliance to "Harmonic suppression guideline of the double voltage With reactor (AC side) K42 = 0.35

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
transistorized inverter (input current of 20A or less) for consumers 4 rectification)
Single-phase bridge Without reactor K43 = 2.9
other than specific consumers" published by JEMA. (capacitor smoothing,
full-wave rectification) With reactor (AC side) K44 = 1.3
Input Self-excitation three- When a high power factor
Target 5
phase bridge converter is used
K5 = 0
Power Countermeasures
Capacity

Parameter
Supply

List
Connect the AC reactor or DC reactor
Single-phase
0.75kW or less recommended in a catalog or an
100V
instruction manual.

Explanations

Parameters
Single-phase Reference materials
2.2kW or less

of
200V  "Harmonic suppression guideline of
the general-purpose inverter (input
current of 20A or less)"
Three-phase JEM-TR226 (revised in Dec. 2003):
3.7kW or less

Protective
Functions
200V Japan Electrical Manufacturer's
Association
Calculation of outgoing harmonic current
Outgoing harmonic current = fundamental wave current (value converted

Options
from received power voltage)  operation ratio  harmonic content
Operation ratio: Operation ratio = actual load factor operation
time ratio during 30 minutes
Harmonic content: Found in Table.
Instructions

Table 1: Harmonic Contents (Values at the fundamental current of 100%)

Reactor 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th

Not used 65 41 8.5 7.7 4.3 3.1 2.6 1.8
Motor

Used
Three-phase 38 14.5 7.4 3.4 3.2 1.9 1.7 1.3
(AC side)
bridge
(Capacitor Used
30 13 8.4 5.0 4.7 3.2 3.0 2.2
smoothing) (DC side)
Used
Compatibility

28 9.1 7.2 4.1 3.2 2.4 1.6 1.4

(AC, DC sides)
Single-phase
bridge Not used 50 24 5.1 4.0 1.5 1.4 - -
(capacitor
smoothing,
double voltage Used 6.0 3.9 1.6 1.2 0.6 0.1 - -
(AC side)
Warranty

rectification)

Single-phase Not used 60 33.5 6.1 6.4 2.6 2.7 1.5 1.5
bridge
(capacitor
smoothing, full-
wave Used
Inquiry

31.9 8.3 3.8 3.0 1.7 1.4 1.0 0.7

rectification) (AC side)

91
 Application to Motor

Application to standard motors

Motor loss and temperature rise Vibration
The motor operated by the inverter has a limit on the continuous The machine-installed motor operated by the inverter may be slightly
operating torque since it is slightly higher in temperature rise than the greater in vibration than the one driven by the commercial power supply.
one operated by a commercial power supply. At a low speed, reduce The possible causes of vibration are as follows.
the output torque of the motor since the cooling effect decreases. 1. Vibration due to imbalance of the rotator itself including the machine
When 100% torque is needed continuously at low speed, consider 2. Resonance due to the natural oscillation of the mechanical system.
using a constant-torque motor. (Refer to page 93) Caution is required especially when the machine used at constant
speed is operated at variable speed. The frequency jump function
Torque characteristic allows resonance points to be avoided during operation.(During
The motor operated by the inverter may be less in motor torque acceleration/deceleration, the frequency within the set area is
(especially starting torque) than the one driven by the commercial passed through.) An effect is also produced if Pr. 72 PWM frequency
power supply. It is necessary to fully check the load torque selection is changed. When a two-pole motor is operated at higher
characteristic of the machine. than 60Hz, caution should be taken since such operation may cause
abnormal vibration.

Motor torque
When the Mitsubishi Electric standard squirrel-cage motor (SF-JR, 4-pole) and inverter of the same capacity are used, the torque characteristics are as
shown below.

60Hz Torque Reference 50Hz Torque Reference

Advanced magnetic flux vector control

Maximum torque for short time

(0.1K to 3.7K) Maximum torque for short time (0.1K to 3.7K)
200 170
Maximum torque for short time 220V Maximum torque for short time
(5.5K to 15K) (5.5K to 15K)
Output torque (%)

150 130
Output torque (%)

200V
100 85
95 80
85
80 70
70 65
63 Continuous operation torque *1 60 Continuous operation torque *1
(0.1K to 3.7K) 53 (0.1K to 3.7K)
50
45 Continuous operation torque *1 (5.5K) Continuous operation torque *1 (5.5K)
38
Continuous operation torque *1 (7.5K to 15K) Continuous operation torque *1 (7.5K to 15K)
0 0
0.5 3 6 20 30 40 60 Output frequency (Hz) 120 0.5 3 6 20 30 40 50 Output frequency (Hz) 120

When boost is increased

Maximum torque at initial setting (boost setting)
220V
150 Maximum torque When boost is increased
V/F control 

140 for short time Maximum torque at initial setting (boost setting)
Output torque (%)

Output torque (%)

200V 130
120 Maximum torque
Continuous operation torque *1 Continuous operation
100 torque *1 for short time
90 85
80 75
70 70
65
50 45
35 38
30 30
25

3 6 20 30 60 120 3 6 20 30 50 120
Output frequency (Hz) Output frequency (Hz)

 Continuous operation torque is for checking the limit of permissible load torque when using the motor within the permissible ambient temperature,
and is not the motor output torque itself. Maximum torque for short time is the amount of torque a motor can output.
Continuous operation torque of a single-phase 100V power input model is 90% of the continuous operation torque indicated above.
 Depending on the motor capacity or the number of motor poles, the operation at 60Hz or more may not be performed. Make sure to check the
permissible maximum operating frequency of the motor.
 A 60Hz torque reference indicates that the rated torque of the motor run at 60Hz is 100%, and a 50Hz torque reference indicates that the rated
torque of the motor run at 50Hz is 100%.
 To operate continuously with the 50Hz torque reference, reduce the load torque to 85% or less.
 Under V/F control, same torque characteristic applies to the SF-JR type with 2, 4, and 6 poles.

92
 Application to constant-torque motors
SF-HRCA type Standard specifications

Features
(Advanced magnetic flux vector (indoor type)
control)
 Continuous operation with 100% torque even at low speed of 3Hz is Output Number Frequency

Connection
Common Specifications

example
possible (kW) of Poles Range
Load torque is not need to be reduced even at a low speed and 0.2 Standard frequency 60Hz
constant torque (100% torque) continuous operation is possible
0.4  rotation direction (CCW) is
within the range of speed ratio 1/20 (3 to 60Hz). (The characteristic

Specifications
0.75 counterclockwise when

Standard
of motor running at 60Hz or more is that output torque is constant.)
1.5 viewed from the motor end
Continuous operation torque of a single-phase 100V power input 3 to 120Hz
2.2 Lead wire
model is 90% of the indicated value.
 Installation size is the same as that of the standard motor 3.7 4 3.7kW or less ..... 3 wires
5.5 5.5kW or more ... 6 or 12

Dimension
Drawings
 Note that operation characteristic in the chart below cannot be

Outline
obtained if V/F control is employed. 7.5 wires
11 Surrounding air temperature:
3 to 100Hz 40C maximum
15

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
Protective structure is IP44

Explanation
Diagram
 Torque characteristic (during advanced magnetic flux vector control, and initial value for other parameters)

60Hz Torque Reference 60Hz Torque Reference

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
(when inverter is 0.2kW to 7.5kW) (when inverter is 11kW or 15kW)

Parameter
Output torque (%) (60 Hz is standard)

List
Maximum torque for short time Maximum torque for short time
Output torque (%) (60 Hz is standard)

150 150
220V 220V

Explanations
200V

Parameters
Continuous operation torque Continuous operation torque
100 200V 100

of
85
70(60) 80
63(50) 60
50(45) 57
45(40)

Protective
Functions
0 0
0.5 3 60 120 0.5 3 60 100
Output frequency (Hz)
Output frequency (Hz)

Options
Values in parenthesis apply to the 0.2kW to 0.75kW

* Please contact us separately when 150% or more of maximum torque for short time is necessary.
Instructions

 When rapid acceleration/deceleration is needed, the inverter capacity may need to be one rank higher.
 When two or more motors are operated in parallel, torque imbalance is likely to occur as motor slip is smaller than that of the standard motor.
Motor
Compatibility
Warranty
Inquiry

93
 Application to geared motor
GM-S, GM-D, GM-SSY, GM-SHY series Standard specifications
 Wide constant torque range even with the standard type (when
Available
using advanced magnetic flux vector control)
Frequency Range Constant Torque
Load torque is not need to be reduced even at a low speed and (base frequency
Inverter Output Number Range When Using
constant torque (100% torque) continuous operation is possible Type (kW) of Poles 60Hz) Advanced Magnetic
within the range of speed ratio 1/20 (3 to 60Hz). (0.1K to 0.75K) Grease Oil Flux Vector Control
 Wide speed control range Lubrication Lubrication
The motor can be used in the wide speed deviation range of 3 to 3 to 60Hz
GM-S
120Hz GM-SSY
0.1 to
3 to 120Hz
(0.1kW to 0.75kW)
2.2 6 to 60Hz
The characteristic of motor running at 60Hz or more is that output GM-SHY
(1.5kW, 2.2kW)
torque is constant. (0.1K to 0.75K)
0.4 to
Note that the following operating characteristics are not achieved 2.2
4
3 to 120Hz 25 to 3 to 60Hz
under V/F control. 3.7 120Hz (0.4kW, 0.75kW)
GM-D
5.5 6 to 60Hz
25 to (1.5kW, 7.5kW)
7.5
115Hz

Torque characteristic (range during advanced magnetic flux vector control)

(when 0.1kW to 0.75kW) (when 1.5kW to 7.5kW)

250.0
250.0
Output torque (%) (60 Hz is standard)

Output torque (%) (60 Hz is standard)

1.5kW to 3.7kW
200.0 Maximum torque
Maximum torque 200.0
for short time
for short time 5.5kW, 7.5kW
170.0
150.0 150.0

100.0 100.0

70.0 70.0
50.0 1.5kW to 3.7kW 50.0
50.0 50.0
30.0 5.5kW, 7.5kW Continuous operation
Continuous operation torque
torque 0.0
0.0 0 3610 20 40 60 80 100 120
0 36 20 40 60 80 100 120
Output frequency (Hz)
Output frequency (Hz)

94
 Inverter-driven 400V class motor
When driving a 400V class motor by the inverter, surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the motor terminals, deteriorating the

Features
insulation of the motor. In such a case, consider taking the following measures.
(1) Rectifying the motor insulation
1. Use a "400V class inverter driven insulation-enhanced motor".
Note: The four poles of the Mitsubishi Electric standard motor (SF-JR, SB-JR) have the 400V class inverter driving insulation enhanced

Connection
feature.

example
2. For the dedicated motor such as the constant-torque motor and low-vibration motor, use the "inverter-driven, dedicated motor".
(2) Suppressing the surge voltage on the inverter side
Connect a filter on the secondary side of the inverter to suppress a surge voltage so that the terminal voltage of the motor is 850V or less. When

Specifications
driving by the Mitsubishi Electric inverter, connect an optional surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) on the inverter output side.

Standard
Application to special motors
Motor with brake Explosion-proof motor

Dimension
Drawings
Outline
Use the motor with brake having independent power supply for the To drive an explosion-proof type motor in Japan, an explosion-proof
brake, connect the brake power supply to the inverter input side test of the motor and inverter together is necessary. The test is also
power and make the inverter output off using the output stop necessary when driving an existing explosion-proof motor. Please

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
terminal (MRS) when the brake is applied (motor stop). A rattle may contact us for the FR-B, B3 series, which has passed an explosion-

Explanation
Diagram
be heard depending on the type of the brake in the low speed region proof test. The inverter is an non-explosion proof structure, install it
but it is not a fault. in a safe location.

Pole changing motor Geared motor

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
As this motor differs in rated current from the standard motor, The continuous operating rotation range of this motor changes
confirm the maximum current of the motor and select the inverter. depending on the lubrication system and maker. Especially in the
Be sure to change the number of poles after the motor has stopped. case of oil lubrication, continuous operation in the low-speed range
If the number of poles is changed during rotation, the regenerative only can cause gear seizure. For fast operation at higher than 60Hz,

Parameter
overvoltage protection circuit may be activated to cause an inverter please consult the motor maker.

List
alarm, coasting the motor to a stop.
Synchronous motor
Submersible motor

Explanations

Parameters
This motor is not suitable for applications of large load variation or
Since the motor rated current is larger than that of the standard impact, where out-of-sync is likely to occur. Please contact us when

of
motor, make selection of the inverter capacity carefully. In addition, using this motor because its starting current and rated current are
the wiring distance between the motor and inverter may become greater than those of the standard motor and will not rotate stably at
longer, refer to page 85 to perform wiring with a cable thick enough. low speed.

Protective
Functions
Leakage current may flow more than the land motor, take care when
selecting the earth leakage current breaker. Single phase motor
The single phase motor is not suitable for variable operation by the
inverter. For the capacitor starting system, the capacitor may be

Options
damaged due to harmonic current flowing to the capacitor. For the
deviation phase starting system and repulsion starting system, not
only output torque is not generated at low speed but it will result in
starting coil burnout due to failure of centrifugal force switch inside.
Instructions

Replace with a three-phase motor for use.

Motor
Compatibility
Warranty
Inquiry

95
 MEMO

96
FR-E500 Series Compatibility

Item FR-E500 FR-E700

V/F control

Features
V/F control General-purpose magnetic flux vector control
Control method
General-purpose magnetic flux vector control Advanced magnetic flux vector control
Optimum excitation control
Torque boost (Pr. 0) initial value FR-E720-1.5K(SC) to 3.7K(SC): 4%
FR-E520-1.5K to 7.5K: 6% FR-E720-5.5K(SC), 7.5K(SC): 3%

Connection
example
FR-E540-1.5K to 3.7K: 6% FR-E740-1.5K(SC) to 3.7K(SC): 4%
FR-E540-5.5K, 7.5K: 4% FR-E740-5.5K(SC), 7.5K(SC): 3%
DC injection brake operation voltage (Pr. 12) initial value
0.4K to 7.5K: 6% 0.4K to 7.5K: 4%

Specifications
Parameter number change

Standard
Frequency at 5V (10V) input (Pr. 38 ) (Pr. 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency)
Frequency at 20mA input frequency (Pr. 39 ) (Pr. 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency)
Second electronic thermal O/L relay (Pr. 48 ) (Pr. 51 Second electronic thermal O/L relay)
Shortest acceleration/deceleration mode (Pr. 60 ) (Pr. 60 Energy saving control selection)
(Pr. 292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration)

Dimension
Drawings
Outline
Reverse rotation from the inverter operation panel After setting "1" in Pr. 40 RUN key rotation direction
Press . selection , press .
FM terminal function selection (Pr. 54) setting

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
0: Output frequency (initial value), 1: Output frequency (initial value),

Explanation
Diagram
1: Output current, 2: Output current,
2: Output voltage 3: Output voltage
Second applied motor
Pr. 450 Second applied motor
Pr. 71 = 100 to 123

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
Terminal 2 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V selection (Pr. 73 ) setting Pr. 73 Analog input selection
Changed/cleared 0: 0 to 5V (initial value), 0: 0 to 10V
functions 1: 0 to 10V 1: 0 to 5V (initial value)
Operation mode selection (Pr. 79 )
Initial value 1: PU operation mode Initial value 0: External operation mode is selected at

Parameter
power ON

List
Setting 8: Operation mode switching by external signal Setting 8: deleted (X16 signal is used instead)
Setting General-purpose magnetic flux vector
Pr. 80  9999 Pr. 80  9999, Pr. 81  9999, Pr. 800 = 30
User group 1 (16), user group 2 (16) User group (16) only, setting methods were partially changed

Explanations

Parameters
(Pr. 160, Pr. 173 to Pr. 175 ) (Pr. 160, Pr. 172, Pr. 173 )
Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 Input terminal function selection setting

of
Input terminal function selection (Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 ) setting 5: JOG signal (Jog operation selection)
5: STOP signal (start self-holding selection) 6: None
6: MRS signal (output stop) 24: MRS signal (output stop)

Protective
Functions
25: STOP signal (start self-holding selection)
Long wiring mode Setting is unnecessary
(Pr. 240 setting 10, 11) (Pr. 240 setting 0, 11 are deleted)
Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244 ) initial setting
0: Cooling fan operates in power-on status. 1: Cooling fan on/off control valid
Stop selection (Pr. 250 ) setting increments

Options
1s 0.1s
RS-485 communication control source from the PU connector Network operation mode (PU operation mode as FR-
PU operation mode E500 when Pr. 551 = 2)
Earth (ground) fault detection
Instructions

400V class: Detects always 400V class: Detects only at a start

Inrush current limit circuit Provided for the 200V class 2.2K or higher and 400V class Provided for the all capacity
Fixed terminal block (cannot be removed) Removable terminal block
Screw type terminal block (Phillips screw M2.5) Standard control circuit terminal model:
The recommended blade terminal length is 7mm. Screw type terminal block (Flathead screw M2 (M3 for
terminal A, B, and C)
Motor

The recommended blade terminal length is 5mm (6mm

Control terminal block
for terminal A, B and C).
Safety stop function model:
Spring clamp terminal block (Fixes a wire with a
Compatibility

pressure of inside spring)

The recommended blade terminal length is 10mm.
Operation panel Removable operation panel (PA02) Integrated operation panel (cannot be removed)
Parameter unit FR-PU04 FR-PU07
Dedicated plug-in option (installation is incompatible)
Warranty

for 400V class only

Plug-in option FR-E5NC : CC-Link communication FR-A7NC E kit : CC-Link communication
FR-E5ND : DeviceNet communication FR-A7ND E kit : DeviceNet communication
FR-E5NL : LONWORKS communication FR-A7NL E kit : LONWORKS communication
FR-E720-0.1K(SC) to 7.5K(SC), FR-E740-0.4K(SC) to 7.5K(SC), FR-E720S-0.1K(SC) to 0.75K(SC), FR-E710W-
Installation size
0.1K to 0.75K are compatible in mounting dimensions
Inquiry

97
 MEMO

98
Warranty

When using this product, make sure to understand the warranty described below.

1. Warranty period and coverage

Features
We will repair any failure or defect (hereinafter referred to as "failure") in our FA equipment (hereinafter referred to as the "Product")
arisen during warranty period at no charge due to causes for which we are responsible through the distributor from which you
purchased the Product or our service provider. However, we will charge the actual cost of dispatching our engineer for an on-site repair
work on request by customer in Japan or overseas countries. We are not responsible for any on-site readjustment and/or trial run that
may be required after a defective unit are repaired or replaced.

Connection
example
[Term]
The term of warranty for Product is twelve months after your purchase or delivery of the Product to a place designated by you or
eighteen months from the date of manufacture whichever comes first ("Warranty Period"). Warranty period for repaired Product cannot

Specifications
exceed beyond the original warranty period before any repair work.

Standard
[Limitations]
(1) You are requested to conduct an initial failure diagnosis by yourself, as a general rule. It can also be carried out by us or our
service company upon your request and the actual cost will be charged.
However, it will not be charged if we are responsible for the cause of the failure.

Dimension
Drawings
Outline
(2) This limited warranty applies only when the condition, method, environment, etc. of use are in compliance with the terms and
conditions and instructions that are set forth in the instruction manual and user manual for the Product and the caution label affixed
to the Product.
(3) Even during the term of warranty, the repair cost will be charged on you in the following cases;

Terminal Specification
Terminal Connection
1) a failure caused by your improper storing or handling, carelessness or negligence, etc., and a failure caused by your hardware

Explanation
or software problem

Diagram
2) a failure caused by any alteration, etc. to the Product made on your side without our approval
3) a failure which may be regarded as avoidable, if your equipment in which the Product is incorporated is equipped with a safety
device required by applicable laws and has any function or structure considered to be indispensable according to a common
sense in the industry

Operation panel

FR Configurator
Parameter unit
4) a failure which may be regarded as avoidable if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual, etc. are duly
maintained and replaced
5) any replacement of consumable parts (condenser, cooling fan, etc.)
6) a failure caused by external factors such as inevitable accidents, including without limitation fire and abnormal fluctuation of
voltage, and acts of God, including without limitation earthquake, lightning and natural disasters

Parameter
7) a failure generated by an unforeseeable cause with a scientific technology that was not available at the time of the shipment of

List
the Product from our company
8) any other failures which we are not responsible for or which you acknowledge we are not responsible for

2. Term of warranty after the stop of production

Explanations

Parameters
(1) We may accept the repair at charge for another seven (7) years after the production of the product is discontinued. The

of
announcement of the stop of production for each model can be seen in our Sales and Service, etc.
(2) Please note that the Product (including its spare parts) cannot be ordered after its stop of production.

3. Service in overseas

Protective
Functions
Our regional FA Center in overseas countries will accept the repair work of the Product; however, the terms and conditions of the repair
work may differ depending on each FA Center. Please ask your local FA center for details.

4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability

Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi Electric shall not be liable for compensation for:
(1) Damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi Electric.

Options
(2) Loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi Electric products.
(3) Special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and compensation for
damages to products other than Mitsubishi Electric products.
(4) Replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.
Instructions

5. Change of Product specifications

Specifications listed in our catalogs, manuals or technical documents may be changed without notice.

6. Application and use of the Product

(1) For the use of our product, its applications should be those that may not result in a serious damage even if any failure or
Motor

malfunction occurs in product, and a backup or fail-safe function should operate on an external system to product when any failure
or malfunction occurs.

(2) Our product is designed and manufactured as a general purpose product for use at general industries.
Compatibility

Therefore, applications substantially influential on the public interest for such as atomic power plants and other power plants of
electric power companies, and also which require a special quality assurance system, including applications for railway companies
and government or public offices are not recommended, and we assume no responsibility for any failure caused by these
applications when used.
In addition, applications which may be substantially influential to human lives or properties for such as airlines, medical treatments,
railway service, incineration and fuel systems, man-operated material handling equipment, entertainment machines, safety
Warranty

machines, etc. are not recommended, and we assume no responsibility for any failure caused by these applications when used.
We will review the acceptability of the abovementioned applications, if you agree not to require a specific quality for a specific
application. Please contact us for consultation.
Inquiry

99
100
101
 This solution solves customers' issues and concerns by
enabling visualization and analysis that lead to improvements
and increase availability at production sites.
Utilizing our FA and IT technologies and collaborating with e-F@ctory Alliance partners, we reduce the total cost across the entire
supply chain and engineeringchain, and support the improvement initiatives and one-step-ahead manufacturing of our customers.

Procurement Sale, logistics,

Supply chain and service
Production
and
manufacturing
FA integrated solutions Engineering
Product
design
Process
design Operation/Maintenance

reduce total cost chain

iQ-Works/EZSocket iQ Care
(prevention, predictive maintenance,
(CAD/simulation linkage) remote maintenance service)

since2003

Supply chain Sales and

Procurement
distribution
Production
Engineering
chain Product Process Operation and
design design maintenance

ERP SCM MES

IT system
CAD/CAM Simulator SCADA

FA-IT
Data primary processing / Information Data handling
analysis
Interface

Edge-computing C Controller MES interface

Programmable
Shop floor Sensor Drive Mechatronics Energy-saving
Controller

Productivity Quality Sustainability Safety Security

Overall production information is captured in addition to energy information, enabling the realization of efficient production and energy use (energy savings).

•Trademarks
LONWORKS is a registered trademark of Echelon Corporation, DeviceNet is a trademark of the ODVA,
PROFIBUS is a trademark of the PROFIBUS User Organization, and MODBUS is a registered trademark of

Safety Warning
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC USA, INC.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Fuji Xerox Corporation in Japan.
Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and
other countries.
To ensure proper use of the products listed in
EtherCAT is registered trademark and patented technology, licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH, Germany. this catalog, please be sure to read the instruction
Other company and product names herein are the trademarks and registered trademarks of their manual prior to use.
respective owners.
102
 Automation solutions

YOUR SOLUTION PARTNER

Low voltage: MCCB, MCB, ACB

Medium voltage: VCB, VCC

Power monitoring, energy management

Mitsubishi Electric offers a wide range of automation equipment from PLCs and HMIs to
CNC and EDM machines.

Compact and Modular Controllers

A NAME TO TRUST This is why you can rely on

Mitsubishi Electric automation Inverters, Servos and Motors
Since its beginnings in 1870, some
45 companies use the Mitsubishi solution - because we know first
name, covering a spectrum of hand about the need for reliable,
finance, commerce and industry. efficient, easy-to-use automation and
control in our own factories.
Visualisation: HMIs
The Mitsubishi brand name is
recognized around the world as a As one of the world’s leading
symbol of premium quality. companies with a global turnover of
over 4 trillion Yen (over $40 billion),
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation is employing over 100,000 people,
Mitsubishi Electric has the resource Numerical Control (NC)
active in space development,
transportation, semi-conductors, and the commitment to deliver the
energy systems, communications ultimate in service and support as
and information processing, audio well as the best products.
visual equipment and home
Robots: SCARA, Articulated arm
electronics, building and energy
management and automation
systems, and has 237 factories and
laboratories worldwide in over 121
countries.
Processing machines: EDM, Lasers, IDS

Transformers, Air conditioning, Photovoltaic systems

* Not all products are available in all countries.

103
 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Nagoya Works is a factory certified for ISO14001 (standards for
environmental management systems) and ISO9001(standards for quality assurance management systems).

HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BLDG., 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN

L(NA)06051ENG-F(1801)MEE